Nikon | D3s 6MB07411-03 | User's Manual | Nikon D3s 6MB07411-03 User's Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB0C03(11)
6MB07411-03
En
Printed in Japan
En
Where to Find It
Find what you’re looking for from:
i
The Table of Contents
➜ 0 x–xvii
Find items by function or menu name.
i
The Q&A Index
➜ 0 iv–ix
Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find
it from the “question and answer” index.
i
The Quick Start Guide
➜ 0 19–20
A brief guide for those who want to get started taking pictures right
away.
i
The Index
➜ 0 425–430
Search by key word.
i
Error Messages
➜ 0 403–407
If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder, monitor, or control panel,
find the solution here.
i
Troubleshooting
➜ 0 398–402
Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety
instructions in “For Your Safety” (0 xviii–xx).
Help
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other
topics. See page 25 for details.
Digitutor
Digitutor, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available
from the following website:
http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
Memory cards are sold separately.
• D3S digital camera
(0 3)
• BF-1B body cap
(0 31, 375)
• EN-EL4a rechargeable
Li-ion battery with
terminal cover
(0 26, 28)
• MH-22 quick charger
with power cable
and two contact
protectors
(0 26, 417)
• EG-D2 audio/video
cable (0 269)
• UC-E4 USB cable
(0 254, 259)
• Warranty
• BS-2 accessory shoe
cover (0 18, 186)
• AN-DC5 strap
(0 18)
• USB cable clip
(0 255)
• Software Suite CD-ROM
• User’s Manual (this guide)
• Quick Guide
• Software Installation Guide
i
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following
symbols and conventions are used:
D
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before
use to prevent damage to the camera.
A
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before
using the camera.
0
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor
are shown in bold.
A
Trademark Information
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows and
Windows Vista are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation. HDMI, the HDMI
logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. PictBridge is a trademark.
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
ii
Q&A Index
0
iv
Table of Contents
0
x
X Introduction
s Tutorial
0
1
x Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)
0 53
y Recording and Viewing Movies
d Image Recording Options
0 65
N Focus
k Release Mode
0 89
S ISO Sensitivity
Z Exposure
0 109
r White Balance
J Image Enhancement
0 149
l Flash Photography
t Other Shooting Options
0 185
I More About Playback
e Voice Memos
0 221
Q Connections
U Menu Guide
0 253
n Technical Notes
0 365
0 21
0 77
0 101
0 115
0 169
0 199
0 245
0 273
iii
Q&A Index
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer”
index.
❚❚ New Features
Question
How do I take pictures in 35mm format?
How do I take high-quality NEF (RAW)
photos?
Can I use the monitor as a viewfinder?
How do I shoot movies?
Can I shoot movies under low light?
How do I record photographs using two
memory cards?
Can I control how photos are processed?
How do I preserve details in shadows
and highlights?
How do I focus on erratically moving
subjects?
How do I tell if the camera is level?
Can I adjust focus separately for
different lenses?
How do I remove dust from the low-pass
filter protecting the image sensor?
Key phrase
Image area
0
78
14-bit NEF (RAW)
85
Live view
Movies
High-sensitivity movie
mode
53
65
Slot 2
88
Picture Controls
170
Active D-Lighting
181
3D-tracking
297
Virtual horizon
338
AF fine tune
339
Cleaning the low-pass
filter
378
72
❚❚ Camera Setup
Question
How do I keep the monitor from turning
off?
How do I keep the shutter speed and
aperture displays from turning off?
iv
Key phrase
0
Monitor off delay
306
Auto meter off
45,
305
Question
How do I set the clock?
How do I set the clock for daylight
savings time?
How do I change time zones when I
travel?
How do I adjust monitor brightness for
menus or playback?
Can I reverse the exposure indicator?
Can I display the menus in a different
language?
Can I save menu settings for use on a
different D3S camera?
How do I restore default settings?
How do I restore shooting menu
defaults?
How do I restore Custom Setting
defaults?
Key phrase
0
Time zone and date
34,
330
LCD brightness
326
Reverse indicators
324
33,
331
Language
Save/load settings
336
Two-button reset
200
Reset shooting menu
287
Reset custom settings
294
❚❚ Menus and Displays
Question
How do I get more information on a
menu?
How do I use the menus?
Can I get quick access to frequently-used
settings?
Can I get quick access to recently-used
settings?
What does this warning mean?
How much charge does the battery have
left?
Key phrase
0
Help
25
Using the menus
22
My Menu
359
Recent settings
363
Error messages and
displays
403
Battery level
43
v
Question
How do I get more information about
the battery?
How do I keep the file number from
being reset when I insert a new memory
card?
How do I reset file numbering to 1?
How do I clean the camera or lens?
Key phrase
0
Battery info
333
File number sequence
308
Cleaning the camera
377
Key phrase
Number of exposures
remaining
0
❚❚ Taking Photographs
Question
How many more shots can I take with
this card?
How do I take bigger photographs?
How can I get more photos on the
memory card?
How do I focus the viewfinder?
Can I control how the camera focuses?
Can I choose the focus point?
How do I take a lot of photographs
quickly?
Can I change the frame advance rate?
Can I take pictures under low light
without the flash?
Can the ISO sensitivity I choose be
adjusted to ensure optimal exposure?
Can I make photos brighter or darker?
How do I make a time exposure?
vi
44
Image quality and size 83, 86
Viewfinder focus
Autofocus
Focus point
41
89
94
Release mode
102
Shooting speed
104,
307
ISO sensitivity
110
ISO sensitivity auto
control
Exposure compensation
Long time-exposures
112
134
128
Question
Can I vary exposure or flash level
automatically over a series of photos?
Can I create multiple copies of a photo
using different white balance settings?
Can I vary Active D-Lighting
automatically over a series of photos?
How do I adjust white balance?
How do I change settings for optional
flash units?
How can I record multiple shots as a
single photograph?
Can I record voice memo when taking a
photograph?
Can I pick the standard exposure level?
How can I reduce blur?
How do I select movie frame size,
microphone sensitivity, high-sensitivity
movie mode, and card slot options?
Key phrase
Exposure and flash
bracketing
White balance
bracketing
White balance
0
136,
312
141,
312
145,
312
149
Flash mode
193
Multiple exposure
202
Voice memo
246
ADL bracketing
Fine tune optimal
exposure
Exposure delay mode
304
310
Movie settings
70
Key phrase
0
Camera playback
222
❚❚ Viewing Photographs
Question
Can I view my photographs on the
camera?
Can I view movies on the camera?
Can I view more information about
photos?
Why do parts of my photos blink?
Viewing movies
73
Photo info
225
Photo info, highlights
227,
277
vii
Question
How do I get rid of an unwanted photo?
Can I delete several photos at once?
Can I zoom in on pictures?
Can I protect photos from accidental
deletion?
Can I hide selected photos?
How do I tell if parts of my photos may
be overexposed?
How do I tell where the camera focused?
Can I view photos as they are taken?
Can I record voice memos with photos?
Is there an automatic playback (“slide
show”) option?
Key phrase
Deleting individual
photos
Delete
Playback zoom
242
237
Protect
238
Hide image
Display mode:
highlights
Display mode: focus
point
Image review
Voice memo
275
227,
277
226,
277
281
249
Slide show
282
Key phrase
D-Lighting
Red-eye correction
Trim
0
344
345
346
Monochrome
347
Filter effects,
Color balance
348
NEF (RAW) processing
353
Image overlay
349
Editing movies
74
0
240
❚❚ Retouching Photographs
Question
How do I bring out details in shadows?
Can I get rid of red eye?
Can I crop photographs on the camera?
Can I create a monochrome copy of a
photograph?
Can I create a copy with different colors?
Can I use the camera to create JPEG
copies of NEF (RAW) photographs?
Can I overlay two NEF (RAW) photos to
make a single image?
Can I trim movies or save movie stills?
viii
❚❚ Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices
Question
Can I view my photos on TV?
Can I view my photos in High Definition?
How do I copy photos to my computer?
How do I print photographs?
Can I print photos without a computer?
Can I print the date on my photographs?
Key phrase
Television playback
HDMI
Connecting to a
computer
Printing photographs
Printing via USB
Time stamp
0
269
271
Key phrase
Approved memory
cards
Compatible lenses
0
419
Optional flash units
187
Other accessories
375
Other accessories
372
254
258
259
261
❚❚ Optional Accessories
Question
What memory cards can I use?
What lenses can I use?
What optional flash units (Speedlights)
can I use?
What software is available for my
camera?
What AC adapters, remote cords, and
viewfinder accessories are available for
my camera?
366
ix
Table of Contents
Q&A Index ................................................................................................iv
For Your Safety .................................................................................. xviii
Notices.....................................................................................................xxi
Introduction
1
Overview....................................................................................................2
Getting to Know the Camera..............................................................3
Camera Body ....................................................................................... 3
The Top Control Panel ..................................................................... 8
The Rear Control Panel ..................................................................10
The Viewfinder Display..................................................................12
The Information Display................................................................14
The Camera Strap ............................................................................18
The BS-2 Accessory Shoe Cover .................................................18
Quick Start Guide................................................................................. 19
Tutorial
21
Camera Menus...................................................................................... 22
Using Camera Menus .....................................................................23
Help ......................................................................................................25
First Steps ............................................................................................... 26
Charge the Battery ..........................................................................26
Insert the Battery .............................................................................28
Attach a Lens.....................................................................................31
Basic Setup.........................................................................................33
Insert a Memory Card.....................................................................36
Format the Memory Card .............................................................39
Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...............................................................41
Basic Photography and Playback................................................... 43
Turn the Camera On .......................................................................43
Adjust Camera Settings.................................................................46
x
Focus and Shoot.............................................................................. 49
Viewing Photographs.................................................................... 51
Deleting Unwanted Photographs............................................. 52
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)
53
Framing Photographs in the Monitor .......................................... 54
Recording and Viewing Movies
65
Recording Movies................................................................................ 66
Viewing Movies .................................................................................... 73
Editing Movies ...................................................................................... 74
Image Recording Options
77
Image Area............................................................................................. 78
Image Quality........................................................................................ 83
Image Size .............................................................................................. 86
Slot 2 ........................................................................................................ 88
Focus
89
Focus Mode ........................................................................................... 90
AF-Area Mode....................................................................................... 92
Focus Point Selection......................................................................... 94
Focus Lock.............................................................................................. 96
Manual Focus........................................................................................ 99
Release Mode
101
Choosing a Release Mode ..............................................................102
Continuous Mode..............................................................................104
Self-Timer Mode.................................................................................106
Mirror up Mode ..................................................................................108
xi
ISO Sensitivity
109
Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually..............................................110
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ..........................................................112
Exposure
115
Metering ...............................................................................................116
Exposure Mode...................................................................................118
e: Programmed Auto .................................................................. 120
f: Shutter-Priority Auto .............................................................. 122
g: Aperture-Priority Auto ........................................................... 123
h: Manual......................................................................................... 125
Long Time-Exposures.......................................................................128
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock...............................................130
Autoexposure (AE) Lock..................................................................132
Exposure Compensation.................................................................134
Bracketing ............................................................................................136
White Balance
149
White Balance Options ....................................................................150
Fine-Tuning White Balance............................................................153
Choosing a Color Temperature ....................................................157
Preset Manual .....................................................................................158
Image Enhancement
169
Picture Controls..................................................................................170
Selecting a Picture Control........................................................ 170
Modifying Existing Picture Controls ...................................... 172
Creating Custom Picture Controls.......................................... 176
Sharing Custom Picture Controls ........................................... 179
Active D-Lighting...............................................................................181
Color Space..........................................................................................183
xii
Flash Photography
185
Using a Flash .......................................................................................186
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ..........................187
Other Flash Units...........................................................................189
i-TTL Flash Control ............................................................................192
Flash Modes.........................................................................................193
FV Lock ..................................................................................................196
Other Shooting Options
199
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings .......................200
Multiple Exposure .............................................................................202
Interval Timer Photography ..........................................................208
Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................214
Using a GPS Unit ................................................................................217
More About Playback
221
Full-Frame Playback .........................................................................222
Photo Information.............................................................................225
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback .....................235
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................237
Protecting Photographs from Deletion.....................................238
Deleting Photographs .....................................................................240
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback .....................................240
The Playback Menu ......................................................................242
Voice Memos
245
Recording Voice Memos .................................................................246
Playing Voice Memos.......................................................................251
xiii
Connections
253
Connecting to a Computer ............................................................254
Direct USB Connection ............................................................... 255
Wireless and Ethernet Networks............................................. 257
Printing Photographs.......................................................................258
Connecting the Printer............................................................... 259
Printing Pictures One at a Time............................................... 260
Printing Multiple Pictures.......................................................... 263
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set ................................. 267
Viewing Photographs on TV..........................................................269
Standard Definition Devices..................................................... 269
High-Definition Devices............................................................. 271
Menu Guide
273
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images...............................274
Playback Folder......................................................................... 275
Hide Image ................................................................................. 275
Display Mode............................................................................. 277
Copy Image(s) ........................................................................... 278
Image Review ............................................................................ 281
After Delete ................................................................................ 281
Rotate Tall................................................................................... 282
Slide Show .................................................................................. 282
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options...............................284
Shooting Menu Bank .............................................................. 285
Reset Shooting Menu ............................................................. 287
Extended Menu Banks............................................................ 287
Active Folder.............................................................................. 288
File Naming ................................................................................ 290
Vignette Control....................................................................... 290
Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction) .......... 291
High ISO NR................................................................................ 291
xiv
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ..............292
B: Custom Setting Bank ........................................................294
A: Reset Custom Settings .....................................................294
a: Autofocus ....................................................................................295
a1: AF-C Priority Selection .....................................................295
a2: AF-S Priority Selection .....................................................296
a3: Dynamic AF Area ...............................................................296
a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On........................................298
a5: AF Activation.......................................................................298
a6: Focus point Illumination.................................................299
a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around..............................................299
a8: AF Point Selection .............................................................300
a9: AF-ON Button......................................................................300
a10: Vertical AF-ON Button ...................................................301
b: Metering/Exposure..................................................................302
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value ..............................................302
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl. ..........................................302
b3: EV Steps for Exposure Comp.........................................302
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation ......................................303
b5: Center-Weighted Area ....................................................304
b6: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure.........................................304
c: Timers/AE Lock ..........................................................................305
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L .........................................305
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay........................................................305
c3: Self-Timer..............................................................................305
c4: Monitor off Delay...............................................................306
d: Shooting/Display......................................................................306
d1: Beep .......................................................................................306
d2: Shooting Speed .................................................................307
d3: Max. Continuous Release ...............................................307
d4: File Number Sequence....................................................308
d5: Control Panel/Viewfinder...............................................309
d6: Information Display..........................................................309
d7: Screen Tips...........................................................................310
d8: LCD Illumination................................................................310
d9: Exposure Delay Mode......................................................310
e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................311
e1: Flash Sync Speed ...............................................................311
e2: Flash Shutter Speed..........................................................312
xv
e3: Modeling Flash................................................................... 312
e4: Auto Bracketing Set ......................................................... 312
e5: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)............................................. 313
e6: Bracketing Order ............................................................... 313
f: Controls ........................................................................................ 314
f1: Multi Selector Center Button ......................................... 314
f2: Multi Selector....................................................................... 315
f3: Photo Info/Playback.......................................................... 315
f4: Assign Fn Button ................................................................ 316
f5: Assign Preview Button ..................................................... 321
f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button ................................................. 321
f7: Assign BKT Button.............................................................. 322
f8: Customize Command Dials ............................................ 322
f9: Release Button to Use Dial.............................................. 324
f10: No Memory Card?............................................................ 324
f11: Reverse Indicators ........................................................... 324
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup...............................................325
Format Memory Card ............................................................. 326
LCD Brightness.......................................................................... 326
Image Dust Off Ref Photo ..................................................... 327
Video Mode................................................................................ 329
HDMI............................................................................................. 329
Flicker Reduction...................................................................... 330
Time Zone and Date ............................................................... 330
Language .................................................................................... 331
Image Comment ...................................................................... 331
Auto Image Rotation .............................................................. 332
Battery Info................................................................................. 333
Image Authentication ............................................................ 334
Copyright Information ........................................................... 335
Save/Load Settings.................................................................. 336
Virtual Horizon .......................................................................... 338
AF Fine Tune .............................................................................. 339
Firmware Version ..................................................................... 340
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .............341
D-Lighting................................................................................... 344
Red-Eye Correction.................................................................. 345
Trim ............................................................................................... 346
xvi
Monochrome .............................................................................347
Filter Effects ................................................................................348
Color Balance .............................................................................348
Image Overlay............................................................................349
NEF (RAW) Processing.............................................................353
Resize ............................................................................................355
Side-by-Side Comparison......................................................357
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu......................................359
Technical Notes
365
Compatible Lenses ...........................................................................366
Other Accessories..............................................................................372
Caring for the Camera......................................................................377
Storage..............................................................................................377
Cleaning ...........................................................................................377
The Low-Pass Filter.......................................................................378
“Clean Now” ...............................................................................378
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown” ..............................................379
Manual Cleaning.......................................................................381
Replacing the Focusing Screen................................................384
Replacing the Clock Battery ......................................................386
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..........................388
Defaults .................................................................................................392
Exposure Program.............................................................................397
Troubleshooting ................................................................................398
Error Messages ...................................................................................403
Specifications......................................................................................408
Calibrating Batteries ....................................................................417
Approved Memory Cards ...............................................................419
Memory Card Capacity ....................................................................420
Battery Life ...........................................................................................423
Index.......................................................................................................425
xvii
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to
others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using
this equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use
the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the
precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:
icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all
A This
warnings before using this Nikon product.
❚❚ WARNINGS
A Keep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame
when shooting backlit subjects.
Sunlight focused into the camera
when the sun is in or close to the
frame could cause a fire.
A Do not look at the sun through the
viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong
light source through the
viewfinder could cause
permanent visual impairment.
A Using the viewfinder diopter control
When operating the viewfinder
diopter control with your eye to
the viewfinder, care should be
taken not to put your finger in
your eye accidentally.
xviii
A Turn off immediately in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an
unusual smell coming from the
equipment or AC adapter
(available separately), unplug the
AC adapter and remove the
battery immediately, taking care
to avoid burns. Continued
operation could result in injury.
After removing the battery, take
the equipment to a Nikonauthorized service center for
inspection.
A Do not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal
parts could result in injury. In the
event of malfunction, the product
should be repaired only by a
qualified technician. Should the
product break open as the result
of a fall or other accident, remove
the battery and/or AC adapter
and then take the product to a
Nikon-authorized service center
for inspection.
A Do not use in the presence of flammable
gas
Do not use electronic equipment
in the presence of flammable gas,
as this could result in explosion or
fire.
A Keep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in injury.
A Do not place the strap around the neck of
an infant or child
Placing the camera strap around
the neck of an infant or child
could result in strangulation.
A Observe proper precautions when
•
•
•
•
•
•
handling batteries
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when
handling batteries for use in this
product:
Use only batteries approved for
use in this equipment.
Use only CR1616 lithium batteries
to replace the clock battery. Using
another type of battery could
cause an explosion. Dispose of
used batteries as directed.
Do not short or disassemble the
battery.
Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery. If you are
using an AC adapter, be sure it is
unplugged.
Do not attempt to insert the
battery upside down or
backwards.
Do not expose the battery to
flame or to excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to
water.
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage
when fully discharged. To avoid
damage to the product, be sure to
remove the battery when no
charge remains.
• When the battery is not in use,
attach the terminal cover and
store in a cool, dry place.
• The battery may be hot
immediately after use or when the
product has been used on battery
power for an extended period.
Before removing the battery turn
the camera off and allow the
battery to cool.
• Discontinue use immediately
should you notice any changes in
the battery, such as discoloration
or deformation.
xix
A Observe proper precautions when
•
•
•
•
•
•
xx
A Use appropriate cables
handling the quick charger
When connecting cables to the
Keep dry. Failure to observe this
input and output jacks, use only
precaution could result in fire or
the cables provided or sold by
electric shock.
Nikon for the purpose to maintain
Dust on or near the metal parts of
compliance with product
the plug should be removed with
regulations.
a dry cloth. Continued use could
A CD-ROMs
result in fire.
CD-ROMs containing software or
Do not handle the power cable or
manuals should not be played
go near the charger during
back on audio CD equipment.
thunderstorms. Failure to observe
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD
this precaution could result in
player could cause hearing loss or
electric shock.
damage the equipment.
Do not damage, modify, or
A Observe caution when using the flash
forcibly tug or bend the power
• Using optional flash units in close
cable. Do not place it under
contact with the skin or other
heavy objects or expose it to heat
objects could cause burns.
or flame. Should the insulation be
• Using optional flash units close to
damaged and the wires become
the subject’s eyes could cause
exposed, take the power cable to
temporary visual impairment.
a Nikon-authorized service
Particular care should be
representative for inspection.
observed when photographing
Failure to observe this precaution
infants, when the flash should be
could result in fire or electric
no less than one meter (39 in.)
shock.
from the subject.
Do not handle the plug or charger
with wet hands. Failure to
A Avoid contact with liquid crystal
observe this precaution could
Should the monitor break, care
result in electric shock.
should be taken to avoid injury
Do not use with travel converters
due to broken glass and to
or adapters designed to convert
prevent the liquid crystal from the
from one voltage to another or
monitor touching the skin or
with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure
entering the eyes or mouth.
to observe this precaution could
damage the product or cause
overheating or fire.
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this • Nikon will not be held liable for any
product may be reproduced, transmitted, damages resulting from the use of this
product.
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
• While every effort has been made to
or translated into any language in any
form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete, we
written permission.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the
would appreciate it were you to bring
specifications of the hardware and
any errors or omissions to the attention
software described in these manuals at
of the Nikon representative in your area
(address provided separately).
any time and without prior notice.
Notices for Customers in Canada
CAUTION
This Class B digital apparatus complies
with Canadian ICES-003.
ATTENTION
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that
this product is to be
collected separately.
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• This product is designated
for separate collection at an
appropriate collection point. Do not
dispose of as household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery is
to be collected separately.
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with this
symbol or not, are designated for
separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as
household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
xxi
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
The Battery Charger
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the
proper configuration for the power outlet if needed. This power unit is intended to be
correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
D3S
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This CAUTIONS
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate Modifications
radio frequency energy and, if not installed The FCC requires the user be notified
that any changes or modifications made
and used in accordance with the
to this device that are not expressly
instructions, may cause harmful
approved by Nikon Corporation may
interference to radio communications.
void the user’s authority to operate the
However, there is no guarantee that
equipment.
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause Interface Cables
harmful interference to radio or television Use the interface cables sold or provided
reception, which can be determined by
by Nikon for your equipment. Using
turning the equipment off and on, the user other interface cables may exceed the
is encouraged to try to correct the
limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
interference by one or more of the
Notice for Customers in the State of California
following measures:
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
may expose you to lead, a chemical known
antenna.
to the State of California to cause birth
• Increase the separation between the
defects or other reproductive harm. Wash
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet hands after handling.
on a circuit different from that to which Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
the receiver is connected.
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
Tel.: 631-547-4200
radio/television technician for help.
xxii
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage
devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can
sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially
available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image
data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and
then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for
example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for
preset manual. Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying
data storage devices.
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or
reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be
punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or
reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds,
even if such copies or reproductions
are stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper
money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is
prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions
on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private companies
(shares, bills, checks, gift certificates,
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon
tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for
business use by a company. Also, do
not copy or reproduce passports
issued by the government, licenses
issued by public agencies and private
groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as
passes and meal coupons.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused
• Comply with copyright notices
postage stamps or post cards issued by
The copying or reproduction of
the government is prohibited.
copyrighted creative works such as
The copying or reproduction of stamps books, music, paintings, woodcuts,
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and
issued by the government and of
photographs is governed by national
certified documents stipulated by law
and international copyright laws. Do
is prohibited.
not use this product for the purpose of
making illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
xxiii
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to
operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the
camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party
rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal
shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera
or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized
Nikon dealer.
A
Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A
Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing
product support and education, continually-updated information is
available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xxiv
XIntroduction
This chapter covers information you will need to know before
using the camera, including the names of camera parts.
X
Overview..................................................................................... 2
Getting to Know the Camera .................................................. 3
Camera Body ................................................................................................3
The Top Control Panel...............................................................................8
The Rear Control Panel .......................................................................... 10
The Viewfinder Display.......................................................................... 12
The Information Display........................................................................ 14
The Camera Strap .................................................................................... 18
The BS-2 Accessory Shoe Cover ......................................................... 18
Quick Start Guide .................................................................... 19
1
Overview
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR)
digital camera. Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly
to get the most from the camera, and keep them where they will
be read by all those who use the product.
X
D
Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within
its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON
WARRANTY.
D
Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
A
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
2
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and
refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
Camera Body
1 D (bracketing)
button......... 137, 141, 145, 204, 322
2 Release mode dial
lock release .................................... 103
3 Release mode dial........................ 103
4 Eyelet for camera strap ................. 18
5 M (flash mode) button................. 194
6 F (command lock)
button.................................... 130, 131
7 Focal plane mark (E)................. 100
8 Metering selector......................... 117
9 Metering selector
lock button .................................... 117
10 Power switch.............................10, 43
X
11 Shutter-release button ...........49, 50
12 E (exposure compensation)
button .............................................134
13 Eyelet for camera strap ................. 18
14 I (exposure mode)
button .................. 120, 122, 123, 125
Q (format) button........................ 39
15 Top control panel ..............................8
16 Diopter adjustment control......... 41
17 Accessory shoe
(for optional flash unit)........ 18, 186
18 Accessory shoe cover
.......................................... 18, 186, 390
3
Camera Body (Continued)
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
4
Mirror ..................................... 108, 381
Self-timer lamp............................. 107
Microphone (for movies)........67, 71
Flash sync terminal cover........... 186
Ten-pin remote terminal
cover....................................... 217, 376
Flash sync terminal...................... 186
Ten-pin remote terminal ... 217, 376
USB connector cover.......... 255, 259
Lens release button ....................... 32
Connector cover .................. 269, 271
USB connector ..................... 255, 259
12 Connector for external
microphone..................................... 71
13 Audio/video (A/V)
connector....................................... 269
14 HDMI mini-pin connector .......... 271
15 DC-IN connector for optional EH-6
AC adapter .....................................372
16 Focus-mode selector...............90, 99
17 Battery-chamber cover latch....... 28
18 Battery-chamber cover................. 28
19 Meter coupling lever ...................411
20 Body cap.................................. 31, 375
X
1 Pv (depth-of-field preview)
6
button............................. 67, 119, 321
2 Sub-command dial............. 222, 322 7
3 Fn button........................ 82, 197, 316 8
4 Sub-command dial for
9
vertical shooting .......................... 320 10
5 Shutter-release button for
vertical shooting .......................... 320
Vertical shooting shutter-release
button lock ....................................320
CPU contacts
Mounting index.............................. 32
Lens mount............................. 32, 100
Tripod socket
D
The Microphone and Speaker
Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic
devices. Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data
recorded on the magnetic devices.
5
Camera Body (Continued)
X
1 Viewfinder eyepiece...................... 42
2 Eyepiece shutter lever................... 42
3 O (delete) button .................. 52, 240
Q (format) button........................ 39
4 K (playback) button ........... 51, 222
5 Monitor..............................51, 53, 222
6 G (menu) button ............. 22, 273
7 N (thumbnail/playback
zoom) button ....................... 235, 237
8 L (protect) button ................... 238
? (help) button ................................ 25
9 J (OK) button ................................ 23
10 R (info) button .............................. 14
6
11 Rear control panel................. 10, 309
12 ISO (ISO sensitivity) button.........110
Two-button reset button ...........200
13 QUAL (image quality/size)
button .........................................84, 86
14 WB (white balance)
button ...........................151, 156, 157
Two-button reset button ...........200
15 Microphone
(for voice memos) ........................246
X
1 Viewfinder........................................ 41
2 A (AE/AF lock)
button................................96, 97, 321
3 B (AF-ON) button ....... 56, 67, 91
4 Main command dial ........... 222, 322
5 Multi selector .................................. 23
6 Focus selector lock......................... 94
7 Memory card access lamp .....38, 50
8 Memory card slot cover..........36, 38
9 Card slot cover release button
(under cover)................................... 36
Speaker (under cover).......... 73, 251
10 B (AF-ON) button for
vertical shooting ..........................301
11 H (microphone) button .....247, 248
12 a (live view) button........ 55, 59, 66
13 AF-area mode selector.................. 92
14 Main command dial for
vertical shooting ..........................320
7
The Top Control Panel
X
1 Shutter speed .......................... 122, 126 10 Number of exposures remaining ... 44
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
Exposure compensation value ..... 134
Number of shots in
exposure and flash bracketing
sequence ........................................... 137
Number of shots in
WB bracketing sequence............... 141
Number of intervals for
interval timer photography .......... 211
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) ..... 216
ISO sensitivity ................................... 110
Shutter-speed lock icon ................. 130
Flexible program indicator............ 121
Exposure mode ................................ 118
Flash mode........................................ 193
Shooting menu bank...................... 285
Custom settings bank..................... 294
Memory card indicator
(slot 1)............................................. 37, 39
Memory card indicator
(slot 2)............................................. 37, 39
11
12
13
14
15
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills ..........................105
Capture mode indicator .................257
Aperture stop indicator .........124, 369
Aperture (f-number)................123, 126
Aperture (number of stops) ...124, 369
Bracketing increment.............138, 142
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence ............................................145
Number of shots per interval ........211
Maximum aperture
(non-CPU lenses)..............................216
PC mode indicator ...........................257
Battery indicator................................. 43
Frame count ........................................ 44
Preset white balance
recording indicator ..........................160
Manual lens number .......................216
“K” (appears when memory remains
for over 1000 exposures).................. 44
X
FV lock indicator .............................. 197 27 Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator ........................137
Flash sync indicator......................... 311
WB bracketing indicator.................141
Clock battery indicator.............35, 386
ADL bracketing indicator ...............145
GPS connection indicator.............. 219
28 Exposure indicator ...........................127
Focus mode indicator........................90
Exposure compensation
Interval timer indicator .................. 211
indicator .............................................134
Multiple exposure indicator.......... 203
Bracketing progress indicator:
Aperture lock icon........................... 131
Exposure and flash bracketing...137
Multiple exposure (series)
WB bracketing................................141
indicator............................................. 204
ADL bracketing ..............................145
PC connection indicator .................257
24 Image comment indicator............. 331
Tilt indicator.......................................318
25 “Beep” indicator............................... 306
26 Exposure compensation
indicator............................................. 134
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
9
The Rear Control Panel
X
A
LCD Illuminators
Rotating the power switch toward D
Power switch
activates the exposure meters and the
control panel backlights (LCD
illuminator), allowing the displays to be
read in the dark. After the power switch
is released, the illuminators will remain
lit for six seconds while the exposure
meters are active or until the shutter is
released or the power switch is rotated toward D again.
10
Image quality (JPEG images)...........84 6 “K” (appears when memory remains
for over 1000 exposures).................. 44
“Remaining” indicator .................... 309
Color temperature indicator..........157
Image size.............................................86
Memory card slot indicators............ 88
7
ISO sensitivity indicator ................. 110
Image quality ...................................... 84
Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator............................................. 113 8 White balance bracketing
indicator .............................................141
5 ISO sensitivity ................................... 110
ISO sensitivity (high/low gain) ..... 111 9 Voice memo recording
indicator (shooting mode).............247
Number of exposures remaining....44
Voice memo status
10
Length of voice memo ................... 249
indicator ....................................249, 250
White balance fine-tuning ............ 156
White balance preset number...... 167 11 Voice memo recording
mode ...................................................247
Color temperature........................... 157
PC mode indicator........................... 257 12 White balance ...................................151
White balance fine-tuning
indicator .............................................156
1
2
3
4
X
11
The Viewfinder Display
X
1 12-mm reference circle for center6
weighted metering...................... 116 7
2 AF area brackets .......................41, 59 8
3 Focus points .................. 94, 299, 300 9
Spot metering targets................. 116 10
4 Focus indicator ...................... 49, 100
5 Metering......................................... 116
12
Autoexposure (AE) lock ..............132
Exposure mode.............................118
Shutter speed lock icon ..............130
Shutter speed.......................122, 126
Aperture lock icon........................131
11 Aperture (f-number) .......... 123, 126
Aperture (number of stops)
................................................. 124, 369
12 ISO sensitivity indicator.............. 110
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator..... 113
13 ISO sensitivity................................ 110
14 Frame count .................................. 309
Number of exposures
remaining......................................... 44
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills ............... 49, 105
Preset white balance
recording indicator ...................... 160
Exposure compensation value .... 134
PC mode indicator ....................... 257
15 “K” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)........................................ 44
16 Flash-ready indicator * .......197, 412
17 FV lock indicator...........................197
18 Flash sync indicator .....................311
19 Aperture stop indicator ..............124
20 Battery indicator............................. 43
21 Exposure indicator.......................127
Exposure compensation
display.............................................134
Tilt indicator ..................................318
22 Exposure compensation
indicator .........................................134
23 Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator .........................................137
X
* Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached (0 187). The flashready indicator lights when the flash is charged.
D
No Battery
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the
display in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fullycharged battery is inserted.
D
The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low
temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
13
The Information Display
Shooting information, including shutter
speed, aperture, frame count, number of
exposures remaining, and AF-area mode, is
displayed in the monitor when the R button
is pressed.
X
R button
A
Turning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button twice
more or press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn off
automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds. The
information display can be restored by pressing the R button.
A
See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see
Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 306). For information on
changing the color of the lettering in the information display, see
Custom Setting d6 (Information display, 0 309).
14
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Exposure mode ................................ 118
Flexible program indicator............ 121
Shutter-speed lock icon ................. 130
Shutter speed .......................... 122, 126
Exposure compensation value..... 134
Number of shots in exposure and
flash bracketing sequence ............ 137
Number of shots in WB bracketing
sequence ........................................... 141
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) ..... 216
Multiple exposure indicator.......... 203
Aperture lock icon........................... 131
Multiple exposure (series)
indicator............................................. 204
Aperture (f-number) .............. 123, 126
Aperture (number of stops).... 124, 369
Bracketing increment ............ 138, 142
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence ........................................... 145
Maximum aperture
(non-CPU lenses) ............................. 216
Aperture stop indicator.................. 124
9 Exposure indicator ...........................127
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Exposure compensation indicator ...134
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash bracketing....137
WB bracketing................................141
ADL bracketing ..............................145
Number of exposures
remaining ............................................ 44
“K” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)............................................ 44
Frame count ....................................... 44
Manual lens number .......................216
Pv button assignment .... 82, 119, 321
Color space indicator.......................183
Active D-Lighting indicator ...........182
High ISO noise reduction
indicator .............................................291
Shooting menu bank ......................285
Auto-area AF indicator...................... 93
Focus points indicator....................... 94
AF-area mode indicator.................... 93
3D-tracking indicator ............... 93, 297
Flash mode ........................................193
Flash sync indicator .........................311
15
The Information Display (Continued)
X
21 Release mode (single frame/
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
16
continuous) indicator ..................... 102
Continuous shooting speed
.................................................... 104, 307
Clock battery indicator.............35, 386
FV lock indicator .............................. 197
Interval timer indicator .................. 211
Image comment indicator............. 331
Copyright information
indicator............................................. 335
“Beep” indicator............................... 306
Vignette control indicator ............. 290
Exposure compensation
indicator............................................. 134
Battery indicator .................................43
ADL bracketing amount ................ 146
Image area indicator..........................79
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Fn button assignment .....................316
AE-L/AF-L button assignment .........321
Picture Control indicator ................171
Long exposure noise reduction
indicator .............................................291
Custom settings bank .....................294
Focus mode indicator........................ 90
Memory card indicator
(slot 2) ............................................ 37, 39
Memory card indicator
(slot 1) ............................................ 37, 39
GPS connection indicator...............219
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator ........................137
WB bracketing indicator.................141
ADL bracketing indicator ...............145
❚❚ Changing Settings in the Information Display
To change settings for the items listed below,
press the R button in the information
display. Highlight items using the multi
selector and press J to view options for the
highlighted item.
R button
1
2
3
4
5
Shooting menu bank.................. 285
High ISO noise reduction........... 291
Active D-Lighting......................... 181
Color space.................................... 183
Pv button assignment ................ 321
X
Fn button assignment................. 316
AE-L/AF-L button assignment..... 321
Picture Control.............................. 170
Long exposure noise
reduction ....................................... 291
10 Custom settings bank................. 294
6
7
8
9
A
Tool Tips
A tool tip giving the name of the selected item appears in the
information display. Tool tips can be turned off using Custom Setting d7
(Screen tips; 0 310).
A
Viewing Button Assignments
0, 2, and 4 icons indicate the “button press” function (0 316, 321)
performed respectively by the Pv button, Fn button, and AE-L/AF-L button.
The “button+command dials” functions (0 318) are indicated by 1, 3,
and 5 icons. If separate functions have been assigned to “button press”
and “button + command dials,” the latter assignment can be viewed by
pressing the N button.
17
The Camera Strap
Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera
body as shown below.
X
The BS-2 Accessory Shoe Cover
The supplied BS-2 accessory shoe
cover can be used to protect the
accessory shoe or to prevent light
reflected from the metal parts of
the shoe from appearing in
photographs. The BS-2 attaches
to the camera accessory shoe as
shown at right.
To remove the accessory shoe
cover, hold it down with your
thumb and slide it off as shown at
right while keeping a firm grip on
the camera.
18
Quick Start Guide
Follow these steps for a quick start with the D3S.
1
Charge the battery (0 26).
X
2
Insert the battery (0 28).
Attach the battery-chamber cover before
inserting the battery.
3
Attach a lens (0 31).
Mounting
index
4
Insert a memory card (0 36).
Back
19
5
Turn the camera on (0 43).
For information on choosing a language
and setting the time and date, see page 33.
See page 41 for information on adjusting
viewfinder focus.
X
6
Select single-servo autofocus (0 47, 90).
Rotate the focus-mode selector to S (single-servo autofocus).
7
Focus and shoot (0 49, 50).
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus, then
press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way
down to take the photograph.
8
20
View the
photograph
(0 51).
K button
Focus indicator
sTutorial
This section describes how to use the camera menus, how to ready
the camera for use, and how to take your first pictures and play
them back.
s
Camera Menus ......................................................................... 22
Using Camera Menus ............................................................................. 23
Help .............................................................................................................. 25
First Steps ................................................................................. 26
Charge the Battery .................................................................................. 26
Insert the Battery ..................................................................................... 28
Attach a Lens............................................................................................. 31
Basic Setup................................................................................................. 33
Insert a Memory Card............................................................................. 36
Format the Memory Card ..................................................................... 39
Adjust Viewfinder Focus........................................................................ 41
Basic Photography and Playback......................................... 43
Turn the Camera On ............................................................................... 43
Adjust Camera Settings......................................................................... 46
Focus and Shoot ...................................................................................... 49
Viewing Photographs............................................................................. 51
Deleting Unwanted Photographs ..................................................... 52
21
Camera Menus
Most shooting, playback, and setup options
can be accessed from the camera menus. To
view the menus, press the G button.
s
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
• D: Playback (0 274)
• C: Shooting (0 284)
• A: Custom Settings (0 292)
G button
• B: Setup (0 325)
• N: Retouch (0 341)
• O/m: My Menu or Recent settings
(defaults to My Menu; 0 359)
Slider shows position in current menu.
Current settings are shown by icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
d
If d icon is displayed, help for current item can be viewed by pressing L
(Q) button (0 25).
22
Using Camera Menus
❚❚ Menu Controls
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the menus.
Multi selector
Move cursor up
Cancel and return
to previous menu
Select
highlighted
item
Select
highlighted
item or display
sub-menu
Move cursor down
s
J button
Select highlighted
item
❚❚ Navigating the Menus
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1
Display the menus.
G button
Press the G button to display the
menus.
2
Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon
for the current menu.
23
3
Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
s
4
Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor
in the selected menu.
5
Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item.
6
Display options.
Press 2 to display options for
the selected menu item.
7
Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option.
24
8
Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item.
To exit without making a selection, press
the G button.
J button
s
Note the following points:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.
• While pressing 2 or the center of the multi selector generally has
the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in which
selection can only be made by pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway (0 50).
Help
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left
corner of the monitor, help can be displayed
by pressing the L (Q) button.
A description of the currently
selected option or menu will
be displayed while the button
is pressed. Press 1 or 3 to
scroll through the display.
L (Q) button
25
First Steps
Charge the Battery
s
The D3S is powered by an EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion battery
(supplied). To maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the
supplied MH-22 quick charger before use. About two hours and
twenty-five minutes are required to fully recharge the battery
when no charge remains.
1
Plug the charger in.
Insert the AC adapter plug into the
battery charger and plug the power
cable into an electrical outlet.
2
Remove the terminal cover.
Remove the terminal cover from the
battery.
Terminal cover
3
Remove the contact protector.
Remove the contact protector from the
quick charger battery chamber.
26
4
Charge the battery.
Contacts
Chamber
lamps
Charge
lamps
(green)
s
Guide
Insert the battery (terminals first), aligning the end of the
battery with the guide and then sliding the battery in the
direction indicated until it clicks into place. The chamber lamp
and charge lamps will blink while the battery charges:
Charge state
Less than 50% of maximum capacity
50–80% of maximum capacity
More than 80% but less than 100% of
maximum capacity
100% of maximum capacity
Charge lamps
Chamber
50%
80%
100%
lamp
H (blinks) H (blinks) I (off)
I (off)
H (blinks) K (glows) H (blinks) I (off)
H (blinks) K (glows) K (glows) H (blinks)
K (glows)
I (off)
I (off)
I (off)
Charging is complete when the chamber lamp stops blinking
and the charge lamps turn off. About two hours and twentyfive minutes are required to fully charge an exhausted battery.
5
Remove the battery when charging is complete.
Remove the battery and unplug the charger.
D
Calibration
See page 417 for more information on calibration.
27
Insert the Battery
1
s
Turn the camera off.
Power switch
D
Inserting and Removing Batteries
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries.
2
Remove the battery-chamber cover.
Lift the battery-chamber cover latch, turn it
to the open (A) position (q) and remove
the BL-4 battery-chamber cover (w).
3
Attach the cover to the battery.
If the battery release is positioned so that
the arrow (4) is visible, slide the battery
release to cover the arrow. Insert the two
projections on the battery into the
matching slots in the cover and slide the
battery release to reveal the arrow.
D
The BL-4 Battery-Chamber Cover
The battery can be charged with the BL-4 attached. To prevent dust from
accumulating inside the battery chamber when the battery is not
inserted, slide the battery release in the direction indicated by the arrow
(4), remove the BL-4 from the battery, and replace it on the camera.
The BL-1 battery-chamber cover for D2-series cameras can not be used.
28
4
Insert the battery.
Insert the battery as shown at right.
5
Latch the cover.
To prevent the battery from
becoming dislodged during
operation, rotate the latch to
the closed position and fold it
down as shown at right. Be
sure the cover is securely
latched.
s
D
EN-EL4a Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries
The supplied EN-EL4a shares information with compatible devices,
enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels (0 43).
The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge,
battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last
charged (0 333). The battery can be recalibrated as necessary to
ensure that battery level continues to be reported accurately (0 417).
29
D
The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii–xx and 388–391
of this manual.
s
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or
above 40 °C (104 °F). Charge indoors at ambient temperatures in the
vicinity of 5–35°C (41–95 °F); for best results, charge the battery at
temperatures above 20 °C (68 °F). Battery capacity may temporarily
drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a
temperature below the temperature at which it was charged. If the
battery is charged at a temperature below 5 °C (41 °F), the battery life
indicator in the Battery info (0 333) display may show a temporary
decrease.
The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to
cool before recharging.
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in
use.
A
Compatible Batteries
The camera can also be used with EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion batteries.
A
Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera
off, lift the battery-chamber cover latch, and
turn it to the open (A) position. To prevent
short-circuits, replace the terminal cover when
the battery is not in use.
30
Attach a Lens
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera
when the lens is removed. An AF Nikkor 85 mm f/1.4D IF lens is
used in this manual for illustrative purposes.
Lens cap
Mounting index
CPU contacts (0 368)
s
Aperture ring
A-M mode switch (0 32, 99)
Focus ring (0 99)
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap.
31
3
Attach the lens.
Keeping the mounting
index on the lens aligned
with the mounting index
Mounting
on the camera body,
index
position the lens in the
camera’s bayonet mount
(q). Being careful not to press the lens-release button, rotate
the lens counter-clockwise until it clicks into place (w).
s
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or
M/A-M switch, select A (autofocus) or
M/A (autofocus with manual priority).
❚❚ Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens,
press and hold the lens release button (q)
while turning the lens clockwise (w). After
removing the lens, replace the lens caps
and camera body cap.
D
CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 368), lock
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).
A
Image Area
The DX format image area is automatically
selected when a DX lens is attached (0 78).
Image area
32
Basic Setup
The language option in the setup menu is automatically
highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a language
and set the time and date.
1
Turn the camera on.
Power switch
s
2
Select Language in the
setup menu.
G button
Press G to display the
camera menus, then select
Language in the setup menu.
For information on using
menus, see “Using Camera
Menus” (0 23).
3
Select a language.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the
desired language and press J.
33
4
Select Time zone and date.
Select Time zone and date
and press 2.
5
s
Set time zone.
Select Time zone and press 2.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the
local time zone (the UTC field
shows the difference between
the selected time zone and
Coordinated Universal Time, or
UTC, in hours) and press J.
6
Turn daylight saving time
on or off.
Select Daylight saving time
and press 2. Daylight saving
time is off by default; if daylight
saving time is in effect in the local time zone, press 1 to
highlight On and press J.
7
Set the date and time.
Select Date and time and
press 2. Press 4 or 2 to select
an item, 1 or 3 to change.
Press J when the clock is set to
the current date and time.
34
8
Set date format.
Select Date format and press
2. Press 1 or 3 to choose the
order in which the year, month,
and day will be displayed and
press J.
9
Exit to shooting mode.
s
Press the shutter-release button halfway
to exit to shooting mode.
A
The B Icon
If a flashing B icon appears in the top control panel the first time the
camera is used, check that clock settings (including time zone and
daylight saving time) are correct. The icon disappears when the J
button is pressed to exit the menu.
A
The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by a separate, non-rechargeable CR1616
lithium battery with a life of about four years. When this battery is
exhausted, a B icon will be displayed in the top control panel while
the exposure meters are on. For information on replacing the clock
battery, see page 386.
A
The Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household
clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and
reset as necessary.
A
GPS Units (0 217)
If a GPS unit (0 376) is connected, the camera clock will be set to the
time and date provided by the GPS unit (0 220).
A
Nikon Transfer
If the camera is connected to a computer, the supplied Nikon Transfer
software can be used to synchronize the camera clock with the
computer (Mac OS X version 10.5.7 excluded). Nikon Transfer can be
installed from the supplied Software Suite CD.
35
Insert a Memory Card
The camera stores photographs on Type I CompactFlash memory
cards (available separately; 0 419). Type II cards and microdrives
can not be used. Up to two memory cards can be inserted in the
camera simultaneously. The following section describes how to
insert and format a memory card.
s
1
Turn the camera off.
Power switch
D
Inserting and Removing Memory Cards
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory
cards.
2
Open the card slot cover.
Open the door protecting the card-slot
cover release button (q) and press the
release button (w) to open the card slot
(e).
36
A
Memory Card Slots
Slot 1 is for the main card; the card in slot 2 plays
a backup or secondary role. If the default setting
of Overflow is selected for Slot 2 (0 88) when
two memory cards are inserted, the card in
slot 2 will only be used when the card in slot 1 is
full.
Slot 1
Slot 2
The card currently in use is indicated in the top
control panel and information display (the
illustrations at right show the displays when
two cards are inserted).
s
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Top control panel
Information display
3
Insert the memory card.
Insert the first memory card in slot 1.
Slot 2 should be used only if a card is
already inserted in slot 1. Insert the
memory card with the rear label toward
the monitor (q). When the memory
card is fully inserted, the eject button will
pop up (w) and the green access lamp
will light briefly.
Eject button
Rear label
Access lamp
37
D
Direction of
insertion
4GB
Inserting Memory Cards
Insert the memory card terminals first.
Inserting the card upside down or backwards
could damage the camera or the card. Check to
be sure that the card is in the correct
orientation.
Terminals
Rear label
s
4
Close the card slot cover.
If this is the first time the memory card
will be used after being used or
formatted in another device, format the
card as described on page 39.
❚❚ Removing Memory Cards
1
Turn the camera off.
Confirm that the access lamp is off and
turn the camera off.
Access lamp
2
Remove the memory card.
Open the memory card slot cover (q)
and press the eject button (w) to
partially eject the card (e). The memory
card can then be removed by hand. Do
not push on the memory card while
pressing the eject button. Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the camera or memory card.
38
Format the Memory Card
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being
used or formatted in other devices.
D
Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain.
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a
computer before proceeding (0 254).
s
1
Turn the camera on.
2
Press the Q buttons.
O button I button
Hold the Q (I and O)
buttons down simultaneously
until a blinking C appears
in the shutter-speed displays
in the top control panel and
viewfinder. If two memory
cards are inserted, the card in
slot 1 (0 37) will be selected;
you can choose the card in
slot 2 by rotating the main
command dial. To exit without
formatting the memory card,
wait until C stops blinking
(about six seconds) or press any button other than the Q
(I and O) buttons.
SHOOT
3
Press the Q buttons again.
Press the Q (I and O) buttons together a second time
while C is blinking to format the memory card. Do not
remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power
source during formatting.
39
When formatting is complete, the top
control panel and viewfinder will show
the number of photographs that can
be recorded at current settings and the
frame-count displays will show B.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
s
D
Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
A
No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, the top control
panel and viewfinder will show S. If the
camera is turned off with a charged EN-EL4a
battery and no memory card inserted, S
will be displayed in the top control panel.
A
SHOOT
CUSTOM
See Also
See page 326 for information on formatting memory cards using the
Format memory card option in the setup menu.
40
Adjust Viewfinder Focus
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate
individual differences in vision. Check that the display in the
viewfinder is in focus before shooting.
1
Turn the camera on.
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.
s
2
Lift the diopter adjustment control
(q).
3
Focus the viewfinder.
Rotate the diopter adjustment control
(w) until the viewfinder display, focus
points, and AF area brackets are in
sharp focus.
AF area brackets
Focus point
41
4
Replace the diopter adjustment
control.
Push the diopter adjustment control
back in (e).
s
A
Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses
Corrective lenses (available separately; 0 373)
can be used to further adjust viewfinder
diopter. Before attaching a diopter-adjustment
viewfinder lens, remove the DK-17 viewfinder
eyepiece by closing the viewfinder shutter to
release the eyepiece lock (q) and then
unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right (w).
42
Basic Photography and Playback
Turn the Camera On
Before taking photographs, turn the camera on and check the
battery level and number of exposures remaining as described
below.
1
Turn the camera on.
Power switch
s
Turn the camera on. The
control panels will turn on and
the display in the viewfinder
will light.
2
Check the battery level.
Check the battery level in the top control
panel or viewfinder.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Icon *
Control panel
Viewfinder
Description
L
—
Battery fully charged.
K
—
J
—
Battery partially discharged.
I
—
Low battery. Prepare to charge battery
H
d
or ready spare battery.
H
d
Shutter release disabled. Charge or
(blinks)
(blinks) exchange battery.
* No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional EH-6 AC adapter.
43
3
Check the number of exposures remaining.
The top control panel shows the
number of photographs that can be
taken at current settings. When this
number reaches zero, N and n
icons will flash in the top control
panel and a flashing j icon will
appear in the viewfinder as shown at
right. No further pictures can be taken
until you delete pictures or insert a
new memory card. You may be able to
take additional pictures at lower
image quality or size settings.
s
SHOOT
CUSTOM
SHOOT
CUSTOM
A
Large-Capacity Memory Cards
When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thousand or more pictures
at current settings, the number of exposures
remaining will be shown in thousands,
rounded down to the nearest hundred (e.g., if
there is room for approximately 1,260 exposures, the exposure count display will show 1.2 K).
A
SHOOT
CUSTOM
The Battery Indicator
If the segments in the top control panel battery icon blink on and off,
the camera is calculating the battery charge. The battery level will be
displayed in about three seconds.
44
A
Auto Meter Off
The shutter speed and aperture displays in the top control panel and
viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six
seconds (auto meter off ), reducing the drain on the battery. Press the
shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display in the
viewfinder (0 50).
6s
SHOOT
CUSTOM
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Exposure meters on Exposure meters off
SHOOT
CUSTOM
s
Exposure meters on
The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically
can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay,
0 305).
A
Camera Off Display
If the camera is turned off with a battery and
memory card inserted, the memory card icon,
frame count, and number of exposures
remaining will be displayed (some memory
cards may in rare cases only display this
information when the camera is on).
Top control panel
45
Adjust Camera Settings
This tutorial describes the basic steps involved in taking photos.
1
Choose exposure mode e.
I button
Press the I button and rotate the
main command dial to select exposure
mode e. The camera will automatically
adjust shutter speed and aperture for
optimal exposure in most situations.
s
Main command
dial
2
Choose single frame
release mode.
Release mode dial
lock release
Hold the release mode dial lock
release down and turn the
release mode dial to S (single
frame). At this setting, the
camera will take one
Release mode dial
photograph each time the
shutter-release button is
pressed.
46
3
Choose single-point AF.
Rotate the AF-area mode
selector until it clicks into place
pointing to K (single-point
AF). At this setting, the user
can choose the focus point.
AF-area mode
selector
s
Focus point
4
Choose single-servo
autofocus.
Focus-mode
selector
Rotate the focus-mode selector
until it clicks into place
pointing to S (single-servo
autofocus). At this setting, the
camera will automatically focus
on the subject in the selected
focus point when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in
focus.
47
5
Choose matrix metering.
Metering selector
Press the metering selector
lock button and rotate the
metering selector to Y (matrix
metering). Matrix metering
uses information from the
1,005-pixel RGB sensor to
ensure optimal results for the entire frame.
s
6
Check camera settings.
Exposure mode
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Focus mode
Top control panel
48
Metering
Viewfinder display
Focus and Shoot
1
Press the shutterrelease button
halfway to focus
(0 50).
Focus point
At default settings, the
camera will focus on the
subject in the center
focus point. Frame a
Focus
Buffer
photo in the viewfinder
indicator
capacity
with the main subject
positioned in the center
focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway. If
the camera is able to focus, the in-focus indicator (I) will
appear in the viewfinder.
Viewfinder display
I
2
4
2 4
(blinks)
s
Description
Subject in focus.
Focus point is between camera and subject.
Focus point is behind subject.
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus
point using autofocus.
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,
focus will lock and the number of exposures that
can be stored in the memory buffer (“t”; 0 105)
will be shown in the viewfinder display.
For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus”
(0 98).
49
2
Press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way
down to shoot.
Smoothly press the shutterrelease-button the rest of the
Access lamp
way down to take the picture.
While the photograph is being
recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the card
slot cover will light. Do not eject the memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out.
s
A
The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera
focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take the
photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
Focus
50
Take photograph
Viewing Photographs
1
Press the K button.
K button
A photograph will be
displayed in the monitor.
The memory card
containing the picture
currently displayed is
shown by an icon.
2
s
View additional pictures.
Additional pictures can be
displayed by pressing 4 or 2.
To view additional information
on the current photograph,
press 1 and 3 (0 225).
1/ 10
1/ 125 F5. 6
AUTO
N I KON D3S
200
85mm
0, 0
100NCD3S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 04/ 2009 10: 15: 00
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
A
Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 281),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting.
A
See Also
See page 224 for information on choosing a memory card slot.
51
Deleting Unwanted Photographs
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press
the O button. Note that photographs can not be recovered once
deleted.
1
Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to
delete as described in “Viewing
Photographs” on the previous page.
s
2
Delete the photograph.
Press the O button. A
confirmation dialog will
be displayed (the location
of the current picture is
shown by the icon in the
bottom left corner of the
dialog).
O button
Press the O button again to delete the image and return to
playback. To exit without deleting the picture, press K.
A
Delete
To delete multiple images or to select the memory card from which
images will be deleted, use the Delete option in the playback menu
(0 242).
52
xFraming Pictures in the
Monitor (Live View)
This chapter describes how to frame pictures in the monitor using
live view.
x
Framing Photographs in the Monitor ................................. 54
53
Framing Photographs in the
Monitor
x
Press the a button to frame pictures in the monitor. The following
options are available:
• Tripod (h): Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod
(0 55). You can zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor
for precise focus, making this option suitable for static subjects.
Contrast-detect autofocus can be used to compose photographs
with the subject positioned anywhere in the frame.
• Hand-held (g): Choose when taking hand-held shots of moving
subjects, or when framing photographs at angles that make it
difficult to use the viewfinder (0 59). Camera focuses normally
using phase-detection autofocus.
A
Phase-Detection Versus Contrast-Detect AF
The camera normally uses phase-detection autofocus, in which focus is
adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor. When Tripod is
selected in live view, however, the camera uses contrast-detect
autofocus, in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor
and adjusts focus to produce the greatest contrast. Contrast-detect
autofocus takes longer than phase-detection autofocus.
A
Flicker
You may notice flicker or banding in the monitor during live view or
when shooting movies under certain types of lighting, such as
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps. Flicker and banding can be
reduced by choosing a Flicker reduction option that matches the
frequency of the local AC power supply (0 330).
54
Tripod Mode (h)
1
Frame a picture in the viewfinder.
With the camera mounted on a tripod or resting on a stable,
level surface, frame the subject in the viewfinder.
2
Choose Tripod for Live G button
view mode in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button and
select the shooting menu.
Select Live view mode,
highlight Tripod, and press J.
3
x
Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised
and the view through the
lens will be displayed in
the camera monitor
instead of the viewfinder.
a button
55
4
x
Focus.
Autofocus (focus mode S or C): In
tripod mode, the focus point for
contrast-detect autofocus can
be moved to any point in the
frame using the multi selector.
n is displayed when the focus
Contrast-detect focus point
point is at the center of the
frame except when the view through the lens is zoomed in.
To focus using contrast-detect
B button
autofocus, press the B button. The
focus point will blink green and the
monitor may brighten while the camera
focuses. If the camera is able to focus
using contrast-detect autofocus, the
focus point will be displayed in green; if
the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will blink red.
D
Contrast-Detect Autofocus
The camera will not continue to adjust focus while the B button
is pressed in continuous-servo autofocus mode. In both singleservo and continuous-servo autofocus modes, the shutter can be
released even when the camera is not in focus.
Manual focus (focus mode M; 0 99): Use zoom for precise focus.
56
To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 × and check
focus, press the N button and rotate the main command dial.
While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation
window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display.
+
N button
Main command dial
x
Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame
not visible in the monitor.
D
Exposure Preview
In tripod mode, you can press J to preview
the effects of shutter speed, aperture, and
ISO sensitivity on exposure during both still
photography and movie recording.
Exposure is set using matrix metering and
can be adjusted by ±5 EV (0 134), although
only values between –3 and +3 EV are
reflected in the preview display. Note that the preview may not
accurately reflect exposure when an optional flash unit is attached,
Active D-Lighting (0 181) or bracketing is in effect, p is
selected for shutter speed, or the subject is very bright or dark.
Exposure preview is not available when A is selected for
shutter speed.
5
Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way
down to take the picture.
The monitor turns off
during shooting and turns
back on once the photograph is recorded.
57
6
End live view.
Press the a button to end live view.
x
D
Focusing with Contrast-Detect Autofocus
Contrast-detect autofocus will take longer than normal (phasedetection) autofocus. In the following situations, the camera may be
unable to focus using contrast-detect autofocus:
• The camera is not mounted on a tripod
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness, or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or
other light source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodiumvapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns
(e.g., blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when
the camera is unable to focus.
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other
lenses or teleconverters.
A
Remote Cords
If the shutter-release button on a remote cord (available separately; see
0 376) is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode, it will
activate contrast-detect autofocus. If the remote cord shutter-release
button is pressed all the way down without focusing, focus will not be
adjusted before the picture is taken.
58
Hand-Held Mode (g)
1
Choose Hand-held for
Live view mode in the
shooting menu.
G button
Press the G button and
select the shooting menu.
Select Live view mode,
highlight Hand-held, and press J.
x
2
Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised
and the view through the
lens will be displayed in
the camera monitor
instead of the viewfinder.
3
a button
Frame a picture in the monitor.
To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 ×, press the N
button and rotate the main command dial.
+
N button
Main command dial
While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a
navigation window will appear in the bottom right
corner of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll
within the AF area brackets.
59
4
Focus.
Autofocus (focus mode S or C):
Press the shutter-release
button halfway or press the
B button. The camera will
focus normally and set
exposure. Note that the mirror will click back into place while
either button is pressed, temporarily interrupting live view.
Live view is restored when the button is released.
x
Manual focus (focus mode M; 0 99): Focus using the lens focus
ring.
5
Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way
down to reset focus and exposure and take the
picture. The monitor turns off during shooting and turns back
on once the photograph is recorded.
6
End live view.
Press the a button to end live view.
60
D
Shooting in Live View Mode
Although they will not appear in the final picture, flicker, banding, or
distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury
vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or if an
object moves at high speed through the frame. Bright spots may also
appear. When shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at
the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
Noise may be audible when the camera adjusts aperture. Note that no
pictures can be taken in live view if a CPU lens with an aperture ring is
attached with Aperture ring selected for Custom Setting f8 (Customize
command dials) > Aperture setting (0 323). Select Sub-command
dial when using a CPU lens with an aperture ring.
Shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed.
Live view mode can be used for up to an hour. Note, however, that
when used in live view mode for extended periods, the camera may
become noticeably warm and its internal temperature may rise,
resulting in noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog). To prevent
damage to the camera’s internal circuits, shooting will end
automatically before the camera overheats. A count-down display will
appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient
temperatures, this display may appear immediately when live view
mode is selected.
During live view, the camera displays shutter speed and aperture based
on the lighting conditions metered at the start of live view. Exposure is
metered again for the current subject when the shutter-release button
is pressed all the way down.
A m icon in the monitor indicates that On is selected for Movie
settings > High-sensitivity movie mode in the shooting menu (0 72).
Live view is adjusted for sensitivities of from ISO 6400 to Hi 3, but
photographs are taken at the sensitivity selected for ISO sensitivity
settings in the shooting menu (0 110).
Metering can not be changed during live view. Choose a metering
method before starting live view. To reduce blur in tripod mode, choose
On for Custom Setting d9 (Exposure delay mode, 0 310). To prevent
light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure, close
the viewfinder eyepiece shutter (0 106).
x
61
A
The Information Display
To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode, press the
R button.
Information on
Virtual horizon *
Information off
x
Information
+ histogram
(exposure
preview
only; 0 57) *
Framing
guides *
* Not displayed during zoom. Histogram not displayed during zoom or
movie recording.
A
AF area brackets
AF area brackets are displayed only in hand-held mode.
Hand-held
62
Tripod
D
No Picture
After shooting, play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the
photograph has been recorded. In hand-held mode, note that the
sound the mirror makes when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway or the B button is pressed can be mistaken for the sound of
the shutter, and that if single-servo AF is used, a photograph will only be
recorded if the camera is able to focus.
A
Monitor Brightness
Except during exposure preview, monitor
brightness can be adjusted by pressing the K
and 2 button. The brightness indicator at the
right of the display will turn yellow; keeping
the K button pressed, press 1 or 3 to adjust
brightness (note that monitor brightness has
no effect on pictures taken in live view mode).
To return to live view, release the K button.
x
A
HDMI
If live view is used while the camera is
attached to an HDMI video device, the
camera monitor will turn off and the
video device will display the view
through the lens as shown at right.
Press the R button to turn the
histogram display on and off during
exposure preview (0 57).
63
x
64
yRecording and Viewing
Movies
This chapter describes how to record movies in live view.
y
Recording Movies.................................................................... 66
Viewing Movies........................................................................ 73
Editing Movies ......................................................................... 74
65
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded at 24 fps by pressing the Pv button in live
view mode. If desired, choose a Picture Control (0 170) and color
space (0 183) before recording.
1
Choose a live view mode G button
in the shooting menu.
Press G and select the
shooting menu. Select Live
view mode, highlight an
option, and press J. If
Tripod is selected, exposure can be previewed in the monitor
by pressing J (0 57).
y
2
Press the a button.
The mirror is raised and the view through
the lens is displayed in the monitor
instead of the viewfinder.
a button
A Exposure (High-Sensitivity Movie Mode Excluded)
In Hand-held mode, the camera
automatically adjusts shutter speed,
aperture, and ISO sensitivity for all
exposure modes.
In Tripod mode, movies are recorded at the
aperture selected by the user (modes g and
h) or the camera (modes e and f), while
shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are controlled by the camera. In
mode h (0 69), you can press J and adjust aperture, shutter speed,
and ISO sensitivity in the exposure preview (0 57). Exposure preview
is not recommended in modes e and f, as the sound made by the lens
when the camera adjusts aperture may be recorded with the movie.
66
D The 0 Icon
A 0 icon indicates that movies can not be recorded.
3
Focus.
B button
Focus before starting recording.
Frame the opening shot and
either press the B button
(Tripod) or press the shutterrelease button halfway (Handheld) to focus on your subject.
In hand-held mode, autofocus is not available after recording
begins.
4
Start recording.
Pv button
y
j icon
Press the Pv button or the
center of the multi selector
to start recording. Both
video and monaural sound
are recorded; do not cover
Time remaining
the microphone during
recording (the built-in
microphone is located on the front of the camera). The j
icon blinks and the time available is displayed in the monitor.
Exposure can be altered by up to ±3 EV using exposure
compensation; note, however, that changes to exposure,
including AE lock and exposure compensation, can only be
made during exposure preview.
A
Focusing During Recording
To focus in tripod mode using contrast-detect autofocus, press the
B button. Autofocus is not available in hand-held mode after
recording begins; use manual focus to focus during recording (0 99;
note that in hand-held mode, recording will end if the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway or the B button is pressed).
67
5
End recording.
Press the Pv button again to end recording (to end recording
and take a still picture in live view, press the shutter-release
button all the way down). Recording will end automatically
when the maximum size is reached or the memory card is full.
A
Maximum Size
Individual movie files can be up to 2 GB in size. The maximum
length is 5 minutes for movies with a frame size of 1280 × 720, 20
minutes for other movies; note that depending on memory card
write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached.
y
A
Flicker
You may notice flicker or banding in the monitor during live view or
when shooting movies under certain types of lighting, such as
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps. Flicker and banding can be
reduced by choosing a Flicker reduction option that matches the
frequency of the local AC power supply (0 330).
A
See Also
Frame size, microphone sensitivity, high-sensitivity movie mode, and
card slot options are available in the Movie settings menu (0 70). The
role played by the center of the multi selector (either selecting the
center focus point or toggling zoom) can be selected using Custom
Setting f1 (Multi selector center button; 0 314), and the behavior of
the AE-L/AF-L button can be adjusted using Custom Setting f6 (Assign
AE-L/AF-L button; 0 321).
A
Adjusting Microphone Sensitivity
Microphone sensitivity can be adjusted
without leaving live view. Before starting
recording, hold the K button and press 4 or
H. The microphone settings icon will turn
yellow. Keep the K or H button pressed and
press 1 and 3 to adjust microphone
sensitivity.
68
D
Recording Movies
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the
final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed
through frame. Jagged edges, false colors, moiré, and bright spots may
also appear. If a flash or other light source with brief duration is used
during recording, bright bands may appear or the top or bottom of the
frame may brighten. When recording movies, avoid pointing the
camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected.
Depending on the brightness of the subject, changes to exposure may
have no visible effect. Shutter speed and sensitivity are displayed in live
view and during recording, but do not always apply to movies. Note
that movies can not be recorded if a CPU lens with an aperture ring is
attached with Aperture ring selected for Custom Setting f8 (Customize
command dials) > Aperture setting (0 323). Select Sub-command
dial when using a CPU lens with an aperture ring.
y
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed.
When used in live view mode for extended periods, the camera’s
internal temperature may rise, resulting in noise (randomly-spaced
bright pixels or fog; the camera may also become noticeably warm, but
this does not indicate a malfunction). To prevent damage to the
camera’s internal circuits, recording will end automatically before the
camera overheats. A count-down display will appear in the monitor
30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient temperatures, this display
may appear immediately when live view mode is selected.
Sounds made by the camera lens when aperture is adjusted or during
focusing may be picked up by the microphone in tripod mode.
D
Exposure Mode M
When exposure mode h is selected in tripod mode, shutter speed,
aperture, and ISO sensitivity can be changed in the exposure preview
(0 66). Note that the expected results will not be achieved at ISO
sensitivities below ISO 200 or above ISO 12800 or at shutter speeds
slower than 1/25 s, and that auto ISO sensitivity control and highsensitivity movie mode should be off.
69
❚❚ Movie Settings
Adjust movie settings before recording.
1
Select Movie settings
in the shooting menu.
G button
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Movie settings
in the shooting menu and
press 2.
y
2
Choose movie options.
To choose a frame size,
highlight Quality and press 2.
Highlight one of the following
options and press J to select:
Option
a 1280×720 (16:9) *
b 640×424 (3:2)
c 320×216 (3:2)
Frame size (pixels)
1280 × 720
640 × 424
320 × 216
Maximum length
5 min.
20 min.
* Available only when FX format is selected for Image area; if another
option is selected, frame size will be 640 × 424.
A
Frame Size
If the aspect ratio of the crop currently
selected for still images differs from that
of the movie frame, guides showing the
movie frame crop will be displayed during
live view when indicators are hidden
(0 62). The area outside the movie frame
crop is grayed out during recording.
70
To turn the built-in or external microphone on or off or to
adjust microphone sensitivity, highlight Microphone and
press 2. To turn sound recording off, highlight Microphone
off and press J. To turn recording on and adjust microphone
sensitivity automatically, select Auto sensitivity (A).
Selecting any other option turns recording on and sets the
microphone to the selected sensitivity.
A
Using an External Microphone
Instead of the built-in microphone, commercially-available external
microphones can be used to avoid picking up sounds produced by
the lens during focusing or vibration reduction. Stereo recording is
available with any microphone that has a stereo mini-pin jack
(3.5mm diameter).
y
To choose a destination when using two
memory cards, highlight Destination
and press 2. Select a slot and press J.
The menu shows the time available on
each card; recording ends automatically
when no time remains.
A
Using a TV as a Monitor
If the camera is connected to a TV using an A/V or HDMI cable, the
television can be used as a monitor for live view and movie
recording. If an A/V cable is connected when the a button is
pressed, the view through the camera lens will be displayed both
on the TV and in the camera monitor, but the camera monitor will
turn off during movie recording. If an HDMI cable is connected, the
camera monitor will remain off during both live view and movie
recording.
71
To adjust ISO sensitivity to suit lighting
conditions, highlight High-sensitivity
movie mode and press 2. If lighting is
so poor that the subject is difficult to see
with the naked eye, highlight On and
press J to shoot at ISO sensitivities of
ISO 6400 to Hi 3 (a m icon will be
displayed in the monitor). Select Off to
shoot at ISO sensitivities between ISO
200 and ISO 12800.
y A High-Sensitivity Movie Mode
Movies shot at high sensitivities are prone to noise (randomly-spaced
bright pixels, fog, or lines) and after-images of light sources and other
bright objects. If the subject is brightly lit, highlights may be “washed
out” and details may be lost. Check the results in the monitor and turn
high-sensitivity movie mode off if necessary. Note that the camera may
have difficulty focusing using contrast-detect autofocus.
Although m is displayed whenever high-sensitivity movie mode is
enabled, photographs taken while high-sensitivity movie mode is in
effect are shot at the ISO sensitivity selected for ISO sensitivity in the
shooting menu (0 110).
72
Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 222).
Press the center of the multi selector to start playback.
1 icon
Length
Current position/total length
Volume
Guide
y
The following operations can be performed:
To
Pause
Play
Use
3/J Pause playback.
Description
Resume playback when movie is paused or
during rewind/advance.
Speed doubles with each
press, from 2× to 4× to 8×
Rewind/
to 16×; keep pressed to skip to beginning or end
4/2
of movie. If playback is paused, movie rewinds
advance
or advances one frame at a time; keep pressed
for continuous rewind or advance.
N+ Hold N and press 1 to increase volume, 3 to
Adjust volume
1/3 decrease.
Trim movie
J See page 74 for more information.
Resume
shooting
Monitor turns off. Photographs can be taken
immediately.
Display menus G See page 273 for more information.
Exit
1/K Exit to full-frame playback.
A
2 icon
2 is displayed in full-frame and movie playback
if the movie was recorded without sound.
73
Editing Movies
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected
frames as JPEG stills. To view movie retouch options, display a
movie in full-frame playback and press J.
Trimming Movies
1
Choose an option.
To trim the opening footage
from the copy, highlight
Choose start point in the edit
movie menu and press J.
Select Choose end point to
trim the ending footage.
y
2
View the movie and choose a
starting or end point.
Press the center of the multi selector to
start or resume playback, 3 to pause, and
4 or 2 to rewind or advance (0 73;
pause to rewind or advance one frame at
a time). To adjust volume, hold N and press 1 and 3. With
the movie paused on the desired frame, press 1 to delete all
frames before (Choose start point) or after (Choose end
point) the selected frame. Starting and ending frames are
shown by h and i icons.
74
3
Save the copy.
Select Yes and press J to save the edited
copy. If necessary, the copy can be
trimmed as described above to remove
additional footage. Edited copies are
indicated by a 9 icon in full-frame
playback.
D
Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The current position will
be displayed in red if creating a copy at the current playback
position would result in a movie less than two seconds long. The
copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the
memory card.
y
To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly, use a fullycharged battery when editing movies.
A
The Retouch Menu
Movies can also be edited from the retouch
menu (0 341).
75
Saving Selected Frames
1
Choose Save selected
frame.
To save a selected frame as a
JPEG still, highlight Save
selected frame in the edit
movie menu and press J.
2
View the movie and choose a frame.
Press the center of the multi selector to
start or resume playback, 3 to pause, and
4 or 2 to rewind or advance (0 73;
pause to rewind or advance one frame at
a time). To adjust volume, hold N and press 1 and 3.
Starting and ending frames are shown by h and i icons. With
the movie paused on the desired frame, press 1.
y
3
Save the selected frame.
Select Yes and press J to
create a JPEG copy of the
selected frame. Movie stills are
indicated by a 9 icon in fullframe playback.
A
Save Selected Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not
retouched and lack some categories of photo information (0 225).
76
dImage Recording Options
This section describes how to choose image area, quality, and size
and how to choose the role played by memory card slot 2.
Image Area ............................................................................... 78
Image Quality........................................................................... 83
d
Image Size................................................................................. 86
Slot 2 .......................................................................................... 88
77
Image Area
d
The camera’s FX format (36.0 × 23.9 mm)
image sensor can be used to record pictures
with an image area (picture angle)
equivalent to a 35mm (135) format film
camera. Image area is selected using the
Image area option in the shooting menu. At
the default setting of Auto DX crop, the camera will automatically
crop pictures to the DX picture angle when a DX format lens is
attached. The Choose image area option can be used to select a
35mm picture angle or to crop photographs to the DX format or
1.2 × picture angle or to a 5 : 4 aspect ratio.
❚❚ Auto DX Crop
Choose whether to automatically select a DX crop when a DX lens
is attached.
Option
On
Off
78
Description
Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is
attached. If another lens is attached, the crop selected for
Choose image area will be used.
Crop selected for Choose image area is used.
❚❚ Choose Image Area
Choose the image area used when a non-DX lens is attached or a
DX-lens is attached with Off selected for Auto DX crop (0 81).
Option
Description
Images are recorded in FX format using the full area
FX (36×24)
of the image sensor (36.0 × 23.9 mm), producing a
picture angle equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a
c 1.0×
35mm format camera. The edges of pictures taken
(FX format)
with DX format lenses will be blacked out.
A 30.0 × 20.0 mm area at the center of the image
sensor is used to record photographs. To calculate
1.2× (30×20)
the approximate focal length of the lens in 35mm
Z 1.2×
format, multiply by 1.2. The edges of pictures taken
with DX format lenses will be blacked out.
An area at the center of the image sensor
DX (24×16)
23.5 × 15.6 mm is used to record pictures in DX
a 1.5×
format. To calculate the approximate focal length of
(DX format)
the lens in 35mm format, multiply by 1.5.
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4
b 5 : 4 (30×24) (30.0 × 23.9 mm). The edges of pictures taken with
DX format lenses will be blacked out.
FX format
d
DX format (24×16)
image circle
DX format
5:4
1.2×
FX format (36×24)
image circle
79
A
Image Area
The selected option is shown in the information
display.
A
d
DX Lenses
DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a
smaller picture angle than lenses for 35mm format cameras. If Auto DX
crop is off and an option other than DX (24×16) (DX format) is selected
for Image area when a DX lens is attached, the edges of the image may
be eclipsed. This may not be apparent in the viewfinder, but when the
images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the
edges of the picture are blacked out.
A
The Viewfinder Display
The 1.2 ×, DX format, and 5 : 4 crops are shown below.
1.2×
80
DX format
5:4
Image area can be set using the Image area option in the
shooting menu or by pressing the Fn button and rotating a
command dial.
❚❚ The Image Area Menu
1
Select Image area in
the shooting menu.
G button
Press G to display the
menus. Highlight Image
area in the shooting
menu (0 284) and press
2.
2
d
Choose an option.
Highlight Auto DX crop or
Choose image area and
press 2.
3
Adjust settings.
Choose an option and press J.
The selected crop is displayed
in the viewfinder (0 80).
81
❚❚ The Fn Button
The image area can be selected
by pressing the Fn button and
rotating the main or subcommand dial until the desired
crop is displayed in the viewfinder
(0 80). This operation can not be
performed during live view or
while a multiple exposure is being
recorded.
d
Fn button
Main
command dial
The option currently selected for
image area can be viewed by pressing the Fn
button to display the image area in the top
control panel or information display. FX
format is displayed as “36×24”, 1.2 × as
“30×20”, DX format as “24×16”, and 5 : 4 as
“30 × 24”.
D
Auto DX Crop
The Fn button can not be used to select image area when a DX lens is
attached and Auto DX crop is on.
A The Fn, Pv, and AE-L/AF-L Buttons
Changes to image area settings can be made using the Fn button
(Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn button; 0 316), the Pv button (Custom
setting f5, Assign preview button; 0 321), or the AE-L/AF-L button
(Custom Setting f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L button; 0 321). Note that some
“button press” options can not be combined with options using
“+command dials.”
A
Image Size
Image size varies with the option selected for image area.
82
Image Quality
The D3S supports the following image quality options. See page
420 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored
at different image quality and size settings.
Option
File type
NEF (RAW)
NEF
TIFF (RGB)
TIFF
(RGB)
JPEG fine
JPEG normal
JPEG
JPEG basic
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG fine
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG normal
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG basic
NEF/
JPEG
Description
RAW data from the image sensor are saved
directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic
Format (NEF). Use with images that will be
transferred to a computer for printing or
processing.
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit
depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is
supported by a wide variety of imaging
applications.
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:4 (fine image quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:8 (normal image quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:16 (basic image quality). *
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one fine-quality JPEG image.
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one normal-quality JPEG image.
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one basic-quality JPEG image.
d
* Size priority selected for JPEG compression.
83
Image quality is set by pressing
the QUAL button and rotating the
main command dial until the
desired setting is displayed in the
rear control panel.
QUAL button
Main
command dial
Rear control panel
d
A
NEF (RAW)
Once transferred to a computer, NEF (RAW) images can only be viewed
using ViewNX (available on the supplied Software Suite CD) or
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 375). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
retouch menu (0 353). Note that the option selected for image size
does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.
A
NEF (RAW)+JPEG
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed
on the camera with only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG
image will be displayed. If both copies are recorded to the same
memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If
the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the
Slot 2 > RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 option, deleting the JPEG copy will
not delete the NEF (RAW) image.
A
The Image Quality Menu
Image quality can also be adjusted using the
Image quality option in the shooting menu
(0 284).
84
The following options can be
G button
accessed from the shooting
menu. Press the G button to
display the menus, highlight
the desired option and press 2.
❚❚ JPEG Compression
Choose the type of compression for JPEG images.
Option
Description
Images are compressed to produce relatively
O Size priority uniform file size.
Optimal
Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene
P
quality
recorded.
d
❚❚ NEF (RAW) Recording > Type
Choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
Description
NEF images are compressed using a reversible
Lossless
N
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40%
compressed
with no effect on image quality.
NEF images are compressed using a nonO Compressed
reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about
40–55% with almost no effect on image quality.
Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed.
❚❚ NEF (RAW) Recording > NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
Choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
q 12-bit
r 14-bit
Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 14 bits,
producing files larger than 12-bit files but increasing the
color data recorded.
85
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large, Medium, or
Small (note that image size varies depending on the option
selected for Image area, 0 78):
Image area
FX (36×24) 1.0×
(FX format)
1.2× (30×20)
1.2×
d
DX (24×16) 1.5×
(DX format)
5 : 4 (30×24)
Option
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
Size (pixels)
4,256 × 2,832
3,184 × 2,120
2,128 × 1,416
3,552 × 2,368
2,656 × 1,776
1,776 × 1,184
2,784 × 1,848
2,080 × 1,384
1,392 × 920
3,552 × 2,832
2,656 × 2,120
1,776 × 1,416
Print size (cm/in.) *
36.0 × 24.0/14.2 × 9.4
27.0 × 17.9/10.6 × 7.1
18.0 × 12.0/ 7.1 × 4.7
30.1 ×20.0/11.8 × 7.9
22.5 × 15.0/ 8.9 × 5.9
15.0 × 10.0/ 5.9 × 3.9
23.6 × 15.6/ 9.3 × 6.2
17.6 × 11.7/ 6.9 × 4.6
11.8 × 7.8/ 4.6 × 3.1
30.1 × 24.0/11.8 × 9.4
22.5 × 17.9/ 8.9 × 7.1
15.0 × 12.0/ 5.9 × 4.7
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image
size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch
(dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
Image size can be set by pressing
the QUAL button and rotating the
sub-command dial until the
desired option is displayed in the
rear control panel.
QUAL button
Sub-command
dial
Rear control panel
86
A
NEF (RAW) Images
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of
NEF (RAW) images. When opened in software such as ViewNX
(supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately), NEF (RAW) images
have the dimensions given for large (L-size) images in the table on the
previous page.
A
The Image Size Menu
Image size can also be adjusted using the
Image size option in the shooting menu
(0 284).
d
87
Slot 2
Use the Slot 2 option in the shooting menu (0 284) to choose the
role played by the memory card in slot 2.
Option
P Overflow
Q Backup
d
RAW Slot 1 -
R JPEG Slot 2
Rear control panel
Description
The memory card in slot 2 is
used to record photographs
when the memory card in
slot 1 is full.
Each photograph is recorded
to both memory cards.
At image quality settings of
NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF
(RAW) image is recorded to
the memory card in slot 1,
the JPEG image to the
memory card in slot 2. At
other image qualities, this
option is the same as
Backup.
For information on saving movies to a selected slot, see page 71.
D
Backup/RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2
When the above options are selected, the shutter-release will be
disabled when either of the memory cards is full. The viewfinder and
top control panel show the number of exposures remaining on the card
with the least amount of available memory. Voice memos (0 248) are
appended to the copy recorded to the memory card in slot 1.
88
NFocus
– Controlling How the Camera Focuses
This section describes the options that control how your camera
focuses.
Focus Mode .............................................................................. 90
AF-Area Mode .......................................................................... 92
N
Focus Point Selection ............................................................. 94
Focus Lock ................................................................................ 96
Manual Focus ........................................................................... 99
89
Focus Mode
Focus mode is controlled by the
Focus-mode selector
focus-mode selector on the front of
the camera. There are two
autofocus (AF) modes, in which the
camera focuses automatically
when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, and one manual
focus mode, in which focus must be adjusted manually using the
focus ring on the lens:
Option
N
Description
Camera focuses when shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. Focus locks when in-focus indicator (I) appears
S
in viewfinder, and remains locked while shutter-release
Single-servo
button is pressed halfway (focus lock). At default settings,
AF
shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator is
displayed (focus priority).
Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button
is pressed halfway. If subject moves, camera will engage
C
predictive focus tracking (0 91) to predict final distance to
Continuoussubject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings,
servo AF
shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus
(release priority).
Camera does not focus automatically; focus must be
adjusted manually using the lens focus ring. If maximum
M
aperture of lens is f/5.6 or faster, viewfinder focus indicator
Manual
can be used to confirm focus (electronic range finding;
(0 99)
0 100), but photographs can be taken at any time,
whether or not subject is in focus.
Choose single-servo AF for landscapes and other stationary
subjects. Continuous-servo AF may be a better choice with
erratically-moving subjects. Manual focus is recommended when
the camera is unable to focus using autofocus.
90
A
The B Buttons
For the purpose of focusing the camera,
pressing either of the B buttons has the
same effect as pressing the shutter-release
button halfway; note, however, that vibration
reduction (available with VR lenses) can only
be engaged by pressing the shutter-release
button halfway.
B button
B button for
vertical shooting
A
Predictive Focus Tracking
In continuous-servo AF, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking
if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway or either of the B buttons is
pressed. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to
predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.
N
A
See Also
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see
Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0 295). For information on
using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2 (AF-S
priority selection, 0 296). For information on preventing the camera
from focusing when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, see
Custom Setting a5 (AF activation, 0 298).
91
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode determines how the
focus point is selected in autofocus
mode (0 90). To select the AF-area
mode, rotate the AF-area mode
selector. The following options are
available:
AF-area mode selector
Mode
N
92
Description
User selects focus point manually; camera focuses on
K
subject in selected focus point only. Use for relatively static
Singlecompositions with subjects that will stay in selected focus
point AF
point.
• In continuous-servo AF (0 90), user selects focus point
manually; if subject briefly leaves selected focus point,
camera will focus based on information from surrounding
points. Number of focus points used can be selected from
I
9, 21, and 51 using Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area,
Dynamic0 296). If 51 points (3D-tracking) is selected for Custom
area AF
Setting a3, focus point will be selected automatically
using 3D-tracking.
• In single-servo AF, user selects focus point manually; camera
focuses on subject in selected focus point only.
Camera automatically detects
subject and selects focus point. If
type G or D lens is used, camera can
H
distinguish human subjects from
Auto-area background for improved subject
AF
detection. In single-servo AF, active
focus points are highlighted for
about one second after camera focuses. Active focus points
are not displayed in continuous-servo AF.
A
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode is shown in the information
display.
AF-area mode
indicator
AF-area mode
Information display
K Single-point AF
Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area, 0 296)
9 points
I
Dynamic
-area AF *
21 points
N
51 points
51 points (3D-tracking)
H Auto-area AF
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus
points provide information to assist focus operation.
A
Manual Focus
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.
A
See Also
For information on the settings available in dynamic-area AF, see
Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area, 0 296). For information on
adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object
moves in front of the camera, see Custom Setting a4 (Focus tracking
with lock-on, 0 298).
93
Focus Point Selection
The D3S offers a choice of 51 focus
points that together cover a wide
area of the frame. The focus point
can be selected manually, allowing
photographs to be composed with
the main subject positioned almost AF-area mode selector
anywhere in the frame (singlepoint and dynamic-area AF), or automatically (auto-area AF; note
that manual focus point detection is not available when auto-area
AF is selected). To select the focus point manually:
N
1
Rotate the focus selector
lock to ●.
This allows the multi selector to
be used to select the focus
point.
2
Focus selector lock
Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select
the focus point. The center
focus point can be selected by
pressing the center of the multi
selector.
The focus selector lock can be
rotated to the locked (L)
position following selection to
prevent the selected focus
point from changing when the multi selector is pressed.
94
A
Portrait (Tall-Orientation) Photographs
When framing shots in portrait (“tall”) orientation, use the command
dials to select the focus point. For more information, see Custom
Setting f4 (Assign Fn button, 0 316).
A
See Also
For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see
Custom Setting a6 (Focus point illumination, 0 299). For information
on setting focus-point selection to “wrap around,” see Custom Setting
a7 (Focus point wrap-around, 0 299). For information on choosing
the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi
selector, see Custom Setting a8 (AF point selection, 0 300). For
information on choosing the role of the B button for vertical
shooting, see Custom Setting a10 (Vertical AF-ON button, 0 301). For
information on changing the role of the multi selector center button,
see Custom Setting f1 (Multi selector center button, 0 314).
N
95
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing,
making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus
point in the final composition. It can also be used when the
autofocus system is unable to focus (0 98).
1
Focus.
Position the subject in the selected focus
point and press the shutter-release
button halfway to initiate focus.
2
N
Check that the in-focus indicator
(I) appears in the viewfinder.
Single-servo AF
Focus will lock automatically
when the in-focus indicator
appears, and remain locked
until you remove your finger
from the shutter-release
button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L
button (see following page).
A
Shutter-Release Button AE-L
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button
AE-L; 0 305), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
96
Continuous-servo AF
Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock both
focus and exposure (an AE-L icon appears
in the viewfinder, see page 132). Focus
and exposure will remain locked while
the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if
you later remove your finger from the
shutter-release button.
Shutter-release
button
AE-L/AF-L button
3
N
Recompose the
photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked
between shots as long as the
shutter-release button is kept
pressed halfway, allowing several photographs in succession
to be taken at the same focus setting. Focus will also remain
locked between shots while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the
subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus
again at the new distance.
A
See Also
For information on choosing the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button, see
Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 321).
97
Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed
below. The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable
to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (●) may
be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the
shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus. In
these cases, use manual focus (0 99) or use focus lock (0 96) to
focus on another subject at the same distance and then
recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject
and the background
Example: subject is the same color as the background.
N
The focus point contains objects at different
distances from the camera
Example: subject is inside a cage.
The subject is dominated by regular geometric
patterns
Example: blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper.
The focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness
Example: subject is half in the shade.
Background objects appear larger than the subject
Example: a building is in the frame behind the subject.
The subject contains many fine details
Example: a field of flowers or other subjects that are
small or lack variation in brightness.
98
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus
(non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce
the desired results (0 98).
• AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch to M.
• AF lenses: Set the lens focus mode Focus-mode selector
switch (if present) and camera
focus-mode selector to M.
D
AF Lenses
Do not select focus mode S or C.
Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the camera.
• Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode selector to M.
N
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus
ring until the image displayed on the clear
matte field in the viewfinder is in focus.
Photographs can be taken at any time, even
when the image is not in focus.
99
The Electronic Rangefinder
N
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6
or faster, the viewfinder focus indicator can
be used to confirm whether the subject in
the selected focus point is in focus (the
focus point can be selected from any of the
51 focus points). After positioning the
subject in the selected focus point, press
the shutter-release button halfway and
rotate the lens focus ring until the in-focus
indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with
the subjects listed on page 98, the in-focus
indicator may sometimes be displayed
when the subject is not in focus; confirm
focus in the viewfinder before shooting.
A
Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between your
subject and the camera, measure from the
focal plane mark (E) on the camera body.
The distance between the lens mounting
flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm
(1.83 in.).
Focal plane mark
100
kRelease Mode
– Single Frame, Continuous, Quiet Shutter-Release, Self-Timer, or
Mirror Up
Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs:
one at a time (with or without reduced camera noise), in a
continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with
the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize
vibration.
Choosing a Release Mode.................................................... 102
k
Continuous Mode.................................................................. 104
Self-Timer Mode .................................................................... 106
Mirror up Mode...................................................................... 108
101
Choosing a Release Mode
The camera supports the following release modes:
Mode
S
Single frame
CL
Continuous
low speed
CH
Continuous
high speed
k
J
Quiet
shutterrelease
E
Self-timer
MUP
Mirror up
Description
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release
button is pressed.
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records
1–9 frames per second. *
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records
up to 9 frames per second (9–11 fps when DX (24×16) is
selected for Image area; see page 78). *
As for single-frame except that noise is reduced by
disabling beeps and minimizing sound produced when
mirror drops back into place. Beep does not sound when
camera focuses regardless of setting selected for Custom
Setting d1 (Beep; 0 306) and mirror does not drop back
into place until shutter-release button is returned to
halfway position after shooting, allowing you to delay
noise made by mirror. Mirror is quieter than in single-frame
mode.
Use self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused
by camera shake (0 106).
Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto
or close-up photography or in other situations in which the
slightest camera movement can result in blurred
photographs (0 108).
* Average frame rate with continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority
auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, other settings at default
values, and memory remaining in memory buffer. Frame rate can be chosen
using Custom Setting d2 (Shooting speed, 0 307).
102
To choose a release mode, press
the release mode dial lock release
and turn the release mode dial to
the desired setting.
Release mode dial lock
release
Release mode
dial
k
103
Continuous Mode
To take pictures in CH (continuous high speed) and CL (continuous
low speed) modes:
1
Select CH or CL mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to CH or CL.
Release mode
dial
2
k
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
While the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down, pictures will be taken at the frame
rate selected for Custom Setting d2 (Shooting speed, 0 307).
A
Continuous High Speed
In continuous high speed mode, the maximum frame rate for FX
(36×24) format, 1.2 ×, and 5 : 4 (30×24) images is 9 fps. The maximum
frame rate for DX (24×16) format images can be chosen from 9, 10, and
11 fps using Custom Setting d2 (Shooting speed, 0 307) >
Continuous high-speed (note that at 10 and 11 fps, focus will be fixed
at the value for the first shot in each burst and that, when the subject is
poorly lit, exposure will also be fixed at the value for the first shot).
Frame rate drops when vibration reduction (available with VR lenses) or
auto ISO sensitivity control is on.
104
A
Buffer Size
The approximate number of images that can
be stored in the memory buffer at current
settings is shown in the exposure-count
displays in the viewfinder and top control
panel while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. The illustration at right
shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 85
pictures.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
A
The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card. Up to 130 photographs can be taken in succession;
note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full.
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access
lamp next to the memory card slot will light. Depending on shooting
conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a
few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove
or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the
camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will
not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. If the
battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.
k
A
See Also
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs
that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d3 (Max.
continuous release, 0 307). For information on the number of
pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 420.
105
Self-Timer Mode
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for selfportraits. To use the self-timer, mount the camera on a tripod
(recommended) or place the camera on a stable, level surface and
follow the steps below:
1
Select self-timer mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to E.
Release mode
dial
k
2
Frame the photograph and focus.
In single-servo autofocus (0 90),
photographs can only be taken if the
in-focus (I) indicator appears in the viewfinder.
A
Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter
When taking photos without your eye to
the viewfinder, close the viewfinder
eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering
via the viewfinder from appearing in
photographs or interfering with
exposure.
106
3
Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down to
start the timer. The self-timer
lamp will start to blink. Two seconds before the photograph is
taken, the self-timer lamp will stop blinking. The shutter will
be released about ten seconds after the timer starts.
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the
release mode dial to another setting.
k
A
A
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of A is equivalent to
approximately 1/5 s.
A
See Also
For information on changing the timer duration, see Custom Setting c3
(Self-timer, 0 305). For information on setting a beep to sound during
the timer count-down, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0 306).
107
Mirror up Mode
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera
movement when the mirror is raised. Use of a tripod is
recommended.
1
Select mirror up mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to MUP.
Release mode dial
2
Raise the mirror.
Frame the picture, focus, and then press
the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down to raise the mirror.
k
D
Using the Viewfinder
Note that autofocus, metering, and framing can not be confirmed
in the viewfinder while mirror is raised.
3
Take a picture.
Press the shutter-release button all the
way down again to take a picture. To
prevent blurring caused by camera
movement, press the shutter-release button smoothly, or use
an optional remote cord (0 376). The mirror lowers when
shooting ends.
A
Mirror up Mode
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for
about 30 s after the mirror is raised.
108
SISO Sensitivity
– Reacting Faster to Light
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher
the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,
allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. This chapter
describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically.
Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually.................................... 110
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control................................................ 112
S
109
Choosing ISO Sensitivity
Manually
ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 200 and ISO 12800
in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. Settings of from about 0.3 to 1 EV
below ISO 200 and 0.3 to 3 EV above ISO 12800 are also available
for special situations.
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted
by pressing the ISO button and
rotating the main command
dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the control panels
or viewfinder.
ISO button
Main command
dial
S
Top control panel
Rear control panel
ISO sensitivity: 12800
110
Viewfinder
A
The ISO Sensitivity Menu
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the
ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu
(0 284).
A
Hi 0.3–Hi 3
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 3 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–3 EV
over ISO 12800 (ISO16000–102400 equivalent). Pictures taken at these
settings are more likely to be subject to noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines).
A
Lo 0.3–Lo 1
The settings Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities
0.3–1 EV below ISO 200 (ISO 160–100 equivalent). Use for larger
apertures when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than
normal; in most cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 200 or above are
recommended.
A
See Also
For information on Custom Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value), see
page 302. For information on using the High ISO NR option in the
shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities, see page 291.
S
111
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity
auto control in the shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved
at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted
appropriately when the flash is used).
1
Select ISO sensitivity
auto control for ISO
sensitivity settings in
the shooting menu.
G button
To display the menus,
press the G button.
Select ISO sensitivity settings in the shooting menu,
highlight ISO sensitivity auto control, and press 2.
S
2
Select On.
Highlight On and press J (if
Off is selected, ISO sensitivity
will remain fixed at the value
selected by the user).
112
3
Adjust settings.
The maximum value for auto
ISO sensitivity can be selected
using Maximum sensitivity
(the minimum value for auto
ISO sensitivity is automatically
set to ISO 200; note that if the value selected for Maximum
sensitivity is lower than the value currently selected for ISO
sensitivity, the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will
be used). In exposure modes e and g, sensitivity will only be
adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed
selected for Minimum shutter speed (1/4000–1 s; in modes f
and h, ISO sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at
the shutter speed selected by the user). Slower shutter speeds
may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the
ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity. Press
J to exit when settings are complete.
When On is selected, the viewfinder and
rear control panel show ISO-AUTO. When
sensitivity is altered from the value selected
by the user, these indicators blink and the
altered value is shown in the viewfinder and rear control panel.
S
A
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option
in the shooting menu to reduce noise (see page 291). When a flash is
used, the value selected for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor
of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 311).
Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO
sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes
(available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 flash units), possibly
preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds.
113
S
114
VExposure
– Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure
This section describes the options available to control exposure,
including metering, exposure mode, exposure lock, exposure
compensation, and bracketing.
Metering ................................................................................. 116
Exposure Mode...................................................................... 118
e: Programmed Auto............................................................................120
f: Shutter-Priority Auto .......................................................................122
g: Aperture-Priority Auto ....................................................................123
h: Manual..................................................................................................125
Z
Long Time-Exposures........................................................... 128
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock ..................................... 130
Autoexposure (AE) Lock....................................................... 132
Exposure Compensation...................................................... 134
Bracketing............................................................................... 136
115
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The
following options are available:
Method
Description
Recommended in most situations. Camera meters a wide
a
area of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution
3D color
of brightness, color, distance, and composition for natural
matrix II
results.
Camera meters entire frame but
assigns greatest weight to 12-mm
circle in center of viewfinder (if CPU
Z
Center- lens is attached, area can be selected
Centerweighted using Custom Setting b5,
weighted area, 0 304 1). Classic
Center-weighted
meter for portraits. 2
area 3
Z
b
Spot
Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.)
in diameter (approximately 1.5% of
frame). Circle is centered on current
focus point, making it possible to
meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU
lens is used or if auto-area AF is in
effect (0 92), camera will meter
center focus point). Ensures that
subject will be correctly exposed,
even when background is much
brighter or darker. 2
Spot metering
area 3
1 When non-CPU lens is attached, average for entire frame will be used if
Average is selected for Custom Setting b5; otherwise, center-weighted
metering for non-CPU lenses will use 12-mm circle in center of viewfinder,
regardless of setting selected for Non-CPU lens data.
2 For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and
maximum aperture in Non-CPU lens data menu (0 215).
3 Metered area is not actually displayed in viewfinder.
116
To choose a metering method,
press the metering selector lock
button and rotate the metering
selector until the desired mode is
displayed in the viewfinder.
Metering selector
A
Matrix Metering
The metering method used is determined by the type of lens attached:
• Type G and D lenses: Range information is included when determining
exposure (3D color matrix metering II).
• Other CPU lenses: Range information is not included when determining
exposure (color matrix metering II).
• Non-CPU lenses: Color matrix metering is available if focal length and
maximum aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data item in
setup menu (see page 214; center-weighted metering is used if focal
length or aperture is not specified).
Z
A
See Also
For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest
weight in center-weighted metering, see Custom Setting b5 (Centerweighted area, 0 304). For information on making separate
adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method, see
Custom Setting b6 (Fine tune optimal exposure, 0 304).
117
Exposure Mode
Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed
and aperture when adjusting exposure. Four modes are available:
programmed auto (e), shutter-priority auto (f ), aperture-priority
auto (g), and manual (h).
Mode
Z
Description
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for
Programmed
optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots
e auto
and in other situations in which there is little time
(0 120)
to adjust camera settings.
Shutter-priority User chooses shutter speed; camera selects
f auto
aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur
(0 122)
motion.
User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter
Aperturespeed for best results. Use to blur background for
g priority auto
portraits or bring both foreground and
(0 123)
background into focus for landscape shots.
User controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Manual
Set shutter speed to “A” for long timeh
(0 125)
exposures.
A
Lens Types
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 368), lock
the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G
lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode g (aperture-priority
auto) and h (manual). In other modes, exposure mode g is
automatically selected when a non-CPU lens is attached (0 366, 369).
The exposure mode indicator (e or f ) will blink in the top control panel
and g will be displayed in the viewfinder.
118
A
Depth-of-Field Preview
To preview the effects of aperture, press and
hold the Pv button. The lens will be stopped
down to the aperture value selected by the
camera (modes e and f ) or the value chosen by
the user (modes g and h), allowing depth of
field to be previewed in the viewfinder.
Pv button
A
Custom Setting e3—Modeling Flash
This setting controls whether optional flash units that support the
Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 187) will emit a modeling
flash when the Pv button is pressed. See page 312 for more information.
Z
119
e: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal
exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for
snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the
camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture. To take
photographs in programmed auto:
1
Select exposure
mode e.
Press the I button
and rotate the main
command dial until e is
displayed in the
viewfinder and top
control panel.
2
I button
Main command dial
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Z
Shutter speed: 1/320 s; aperture: f/9
120
A
Flexible Program
In exposure mode e, different combinations of
shutter speed and aperture can be selected by
rotating the main command dial while the
exposure meters are on (“flexible program”).
Rotate the command dial to the right for large
apertures (small f-numbers) that blur
background details or fast shutter speeds that Main command dial
“freeze” motion. Rotate the command dial to
the left for small apertures (large f-numbers)
that increase depth of field or slow shutter
speeds that blur motion. All combinations
produce the same exposure. While flexible
program is in effect, an asterisk (“*”) appears in
the top control panel. To restore default shutter
speed and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the asterisk
is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Z
Shutter speed: 1/2,000 s;
aperture: f/3.5
Shutter speed: 1/50 s;
aperture: f/22
A
See Also
See page 397 for information on the built-in exposure program.
121
f: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the
optimal exposure. To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:
1
Select exposure
mode f.
Press the I button
and rotate the main
command dial until f is
displayed in the
viewfinder and top
control panel.
2
I button
Main command dial
Choose a shutter speed.
Rotate the main command dial while the
exposure meters are on to choose a
shutter speed. Shutter speed can be set to
“p” or to values between 30 s (q) and 1/8,000 s (o).
Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving
objects, fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Z
Fast shutter speed (1/1,600 s)
Slow shutter speed (1/6 s)
Shutter speed can be locked at the selected setting (0 130).
3
122
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
g: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera
automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the
optimal exposure. To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:
1
Select exposure
mode g.
Press the I button
and rotate the main
command dial until g is
displayed in the
viewfinder and top
control panel.
2
I button
Main command dial
Choose an aperture.
Rotate the subcommand dial while the
exposure meters are on
to choose an aperture
Sub-command dial
from values between
the minimum and
maximum for the lens. Small apertures (high f-numbers)
increase depth of field (see page 119), bringing both
foreground and background into focus. Large apertures (low
f-numbers) soften background details in portraits or other
compositions that emphasize the main subject.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Small aperture (f/36)
Z
Large aperture (f/2.8)
Aperture can be locked at the selected setting (0 131).
123
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Z
A
Non-CPU Lenses (0 366, 369)
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture.
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been
specified using the Non-CPU lens data item
in setup menu (0 215) when a non-CPU lens is
attached, the current f-number will be
displayed in the viewfinder and top control
panel, rounded to the nearest full stop.
Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops
(F, with maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must
be read from the lens aperture ring.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
124
h: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and
aperture. To take photographs in manual exposure mode:
1
Select exposure
mode h.
Press the I button
and rotate the main
command dial until h
is displayed in the
viewfinder and top
control panel.
I button
Main command dial
Z
125
2
Choose aperture and shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command
dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command dial to
set aperture. Shutter speed can be set to “p” or to values
between 30 s and 1/8,000 s, or the shutter can be held open
indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A, 0 128).
Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and
maximum values for the lens. Check exposure in the exposure
indicators, and continue to adjust shutter speed and aperture
until the desired exposure is achieved.
Sub-command dial
Aperture
Z
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Shutter
speed
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Main command dial
Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected
setting (0 130, 131).
3
126
Frame a
photograph,
focus, and
shoot.
Shutter speed: 1/250 s;
aperture: f/8
A
AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need
only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set
aperture.
A
Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators in the viewfinder and top control panel show
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current
settings (if r or q is displayed in f or g modes, the indicators show
the amount of under- or over-exposure). Depending on the option
chosen for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0 302),
the amount of under- or over-exposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV,
1/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are
exceeded, the displays will flash.
Optimal exposure
Custom Setting b2 set to 1/3 step
Underexposed by 1/3 EV Overexposed by over 3 EV
Top control
panel
Viewfinder
A
Z
Reverse Indicators
Custom Setting f11 (Reverse indicators, 0 324) can be used to reverse
the exposure indicator display.
127
Long Time-Exposures
At a shutter speed of A, the shutter will remain open while the
shutter-release button is held down. Use for long time-exposure
photographs of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or
fireworks. A tripod and optional remote cord (0 376) are
recommended to prevent blur.
1
Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface. If you are using an optional remote cord, attach it to
the camera.
A
Long Time-Exposures
Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via
the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering
with exposure. Nikon recommends using a fully-charged EN-EL4a
battery or an optional EH-6 AC adapter to prevent loss of power
while the shutter is open. Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels or fog) may be present in long exposures; before shooting,
choose On for the Long exp. NR option in the shooting menu
(0 291).
Z
2
Select exposure
mode h.
Press the I button
and rotate the main
command dial until h is
displayed in the
viewfinder and top
control panel.
128
I button
Main command dial
3
Choose a shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are active,
rotate the main command dial until
“A” appears in the shutter-speed
displays. The exposure indicators do not appear when
“A“ is selected.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
4
Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
Press the shutter-release button on the camera or remote cord
all the way down. The shutter will remain open while the
shutter-release button is pressed.
5
Release the shutter-release button.
Remove your finger from the shutter-release button to record
the photograph.
Z
Shutter speed: 35 s; aperture: f/25
129
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock
The F button can be used to lock shutter speed at the value
selected in shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, or to
lock aperture at the value selected in aperture-priority auto and
manual exposure modes. Lock is not available in programmed
auto.
❚❚ Shutter-Speed Lock
To lock shutter speed at the selected value, press the F button and
rotate the main command dial until F icons appear in the
viewfinder and the top control panel.
F button
Z
Main command dial
To unlock shutter speed, press the F button
and rotate the main command dial until the
F icons disappear from the displays.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
130
❚❚ Aperture Lock
To lock aperture at the selected value, press the F button and
rotate the sub-command dial until F icons appear in the
viewfinder and the top control panel.
F button
Sub-command dial
To unlock aperture, press the F button and
rotate the sub-command dial until the F
icons disappear from the displays.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Z
131
Autoexposure (AE) Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering
exposure.
1
Select center-weighted or
spot metering (0 116).
Metering selector
Matrix metering will not
produce the desired results
with autoexposure lock. If
using center-weighted
metering, select the center
focus point with the multi
selector (0 94).
2
Z
Lock exposure.
Position the subject in the selected
focus point and press the shutterrelease button halfway. With the
shutter-release button pressed halfway
and the subject positioned in the focus
point, press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock
exposure (and focus, except in manual
focus mode). Confirm that the in-focus
indicator (I) appears in the viewfinder. AE-L/AF-L button
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.
132
Shutter-release
button
3
Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button
pressed, recompose the
photograph and shoot.
A
Metered Area
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
4-mm (0.16 in.) circle centered on the selected focus point. In centerweighted metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
12-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.
A
Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Exposure mode
e
f
g
Z
Setting
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 121)
Shutter speed
Aperture
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and top control
panel. Note that the metering method can not be changed while
exposure lock is in effect (changes to metering take effect when the lock
is released).
A
See Also
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,
0 305), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. For information on changing the role of the AE-L/AF-L button,
see Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 321).
133
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker.
In exposure mode h, only the exposure information shown in the
exposure indicator is affected; shutter speed and aperture do not
change.
To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E button
and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the viewfinder or top control panel.
E button
Main command dial
Z
±0 EV
(E button pressed)
134
–0.3 EV
+2.0 EV
Exposure compensation can be set to values between –5 EV
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of
1/3 EV. In general, choose positive values to make the subject
brighter, negative values to make it darker.
–1 EV
No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
At values other than ±0.0, the 0 at the
center of the exposure indicators will
flash and a E icon will be displayed in
the viewfinder and top control panel
after you release the E button. The
current value for exposure
compensation can be confirmed in the exposure indicator by
pressing the E button.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Z
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset when
the camera is turned off.
A
Using a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background
exposure and flash level.
A
See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for
exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (EV steps for exposure
comp., 0 302). For information on making adjustments to exposure
compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b4
(Easy exposure compensation, 0 303). For information on
automatically varying exposure, white balance, or Active D-Lighting, see
page 136.
135
Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is
difficult to set exposure, Active D-Lighting, or white balance and
there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each
shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject.
❚❚ Exposure and Flash Bracketing
To vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs:
1
Z
136
Select flash or
G button
exposure bracketing
for Custom Setting e4
(Auto bracketing set)
in the Custom Settings
menu.
To display the menus,
press the G button.
Select Custom Setting e4
(Auto bracketing set) in
the Custom Settings
menu, highlight an
option, and press J. Choose AE & flash to vary both exposure
and flash level, AE only to vary only exposure, or Flash only to
vary only flash level.
2
Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the top control panel.
Number of shots
D button
Main command
dial
Top control panel
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator
At settings other than zero, a M icon and exposure and
flash bracketing indicator will be displayed in the
viewfinder and top control panel.
Z
137
3
Select an exposure increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the exposure increment.
Exposure increment
D button
Sub-command
dial
Top control panel
At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen
from 1/3, 2/3, and 1 EV. The bracketing programs with an
increment of 1/3 EV are listed below.
Control panel display
Z
No. of shots
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
7
9
A
Bracketing order (EVs)
0
+0.3/0/+0.7
–0.3/–0.7/0
0/+0.3
0/–0.3
0/–0.3/+0.3
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/
+0.7/+1.0
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
See Also
For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment, see
Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0 302). For
information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed,
see Custom Setting e6 (Bracketing order, 0 313). For information on
choosing the role of the D button, see Custom Setting f7 (Assign BKT
button, 0 322).
138
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot
according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications
to exposure are added to those made with exposure
compensation (see page 134), making it possible to achieve
exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV.
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator
will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. A
segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Display after first shot
Z
Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by:
0 EV
–1 EV
+1 EV
139
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero ( ) and M is no longer displayed. The program
last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset
(0 200), although in this case the bracketing program will not be
restored the next time bracketing is activated.
A
Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the
shutter-release button is pressed. In other modes, one shot will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
Z
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
A
Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed
(aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode). If On is selected for
ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity auto control in modes e, f,
and g and no flash is attached, the camera will automatically vary ISO
sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera
exposure system are exceeded. Custom Setting e5 (Auto bracketing
(mode M), 0 313) can be used to change how the camera performs
exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode. Bracketing
can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed
and/or aperture, or by varying flash level alone.
140
❚❚ White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with
a different white balance. For more information on white balance,
see page 149.
1
Select white balance bracketing.
Choose WB bracketing for Custom
Setting e4 Auto bracketing set.
2
Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the top control panel.
Number of shots
Z
D button
Main command
dial
Top control panel
WB bracketing
indicator
At settings other than zero, a WB
bracketing indicator will appear in the
top control panel and a W icon will be
displayed in the top and rear control panels.
141
3
Select a white balance increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the white balance adjustment. Each increment is
roughly equivalent to 5 mired.
White balance
increment
D button
Sub-command
dial
Top control panel
Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3
(15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased amounts
of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber
(0 154). The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are
listed below.
Z
Control panel display
A
No. of White balance
Bracketing order (EVs)
shots increment
0
1
0
3
1B
1B/0/2B
3
1A
1A/2A/0
2
1B
0/1B
2
1A
0/1A
3
1 A, 1 B
0/1A/1B
5
1 A, 1 B
0/2A/1A/1B/2B
0/3A/2A/1A/
7
1 A, 1 B
1B/2B/3B
0/4 A/3 A/2 A/1 A/
9
1 A, 1 B
1B/2B/3B/4B
See Also
See page 155 for a definition of “mired.”
142
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a
different white balance. Modifications to white balance are
added to the white balance adjustment made with white
balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the
bracketing program is greater than
the number of exposures remaining,
n and N icon will flash in the top
control panel, a flashing j icon will
appear in the viewfinder as shown at
right, and the shutter release will be
disabled. Shooting can begin when a
new memory card is inserted.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Z
143
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a twobutton reset (0 200), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Z
A
White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW). Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine, NEF (RAW)+JPEG
normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing.
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amberblue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 154). No
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode (0 106), the number of copies specified in the whitebalance program will be created each time the shutter is released.
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.
144
❚❚ ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures. For
more information on Active D-Lighting, see page 181.
1
Select ADL bracketing.
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom
Setting e4 Auto bracketing set.
2
Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the top control panel.
Number of shots
Z
D button
Main command
dial
Top control panel
ADL bracketing
indicator
At settings other than zero, a D icon and an ADL bracketing
indicator will be displayed in the top control panel. Choose
two shots to take one photograph with Active D-Lighting off
and another at a selected value. Choose three to five shots to
take a series of photographs with Active D-Lighting set to Off,
Low, and Normal (three shots), Off, Low, Normal, and High
(four shots), or Off, Low, Normal, High, and Extra High (five
shots). If you choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 4.
145
3
Select Active D-Lighting.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose Active D-Lighting.
D button
Sub-command
dial
Active D-Lighting is shown in the top control panel.
Control panel display
Z
146
Active D-Lighting
Y
Auto
R
Low
Q
Normal
P
High
Z
Extra high
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-shot according
to the bracketing program selected. While bracketing is in
effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the
top control panel. A segment will disappear from the
indicator after each shot.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Z
147
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero. The program last in effect will be restored the
next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled
by performing a two-button reset (0 200), although in this case
the bracketing program will not be restored the next time
bracketing is activated.
Z
A
ADL Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the
shutter-release button is pressed. In other modes, one shot will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
148
rWhite Balance
– Keeping Colors True
The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of
the light source. The human brain is able to adapt to changes in
the color of the light source, with the result that white objects
appear white whether seen in the shade, direct sunlight, or under
incandescent lighting. Unlike the film used in film cameras, digital
cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images
according to the color of the light source. This is known as “white
balance.” This chapter covers white balance settings.
White Balance Options......................................................... 150
Fine-Tuning White Balance.................................................. 153
Choosing a Color Temperature........................................... 157
r
Preset Manual ........................................................................ 158
149
White Balance Options
For natural coloration, choose a white balance setting that
matches the light source before shooting. The following options
are available:
Option
v Auto
J Incandescent
I Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
r
H
N
G
M
Warm-white
fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white
fluorescent
Day white
fluorescent
Daylight fluorescent
High temp.
mercury-vapor
Direct sunlight
Flash
Cloudy
Shade
K Choose color temp.
L Preset manual
Color temp. *
3,500–
8,000 K
3,000 K
2,700 K
Description
White balance is adjusted
automatically. For best results, use type
G or D lens. If optional flash fires, results
are adjusted appropriately.
Use under incandescent lighting.
Use with:
• Sodium-vapor lighting (found in
sports venues).
3,000 K
• Warm-white fluorescent lights.
3,700 K
• White fluorescent lights.
4,200 K
• Cool-white fluorescent lights.
5,000 K
• Daylight white fluorescent lights.
6,500 K
• Daylight fluorescent lights.
• High color temperature light sources
7,200 K
(e.g. mercury-vapor lamps).
5,200 K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
5,400 K Use with optional flash units.
6,000 K Use in daylight under overcast skies.
8,000 K Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
2,500– Choose color temperature from list of
10,000 K values (0 157).
Use subject, light source, or existing
—
photograph as reference for white
balance (0 158).
* All values are approximate. Fine-tuning set to 0.
150
Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If
the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance,
choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance.
White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the rear control panel.
Rear control panel
WB button
Main command dial
A
The White Balance Menu
White balance can also be adjusted using the
White balance option in the shooting menu
(0 284).
A I (Fluorescent)
Selecting I (Fluorescent) with the WB button and main command dial
selects the type of bulb chosen for the Fluorescent option in the white
balance menu (0 284).
r
A
Studio Flash Lighting
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large
studio flash units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to
Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance.
A
See Also
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Auto
bracketing set, 0 312), the camera will create several images each time
the shutter is released. White balance will be varied with each image,
“bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance. See page
136 for more information.
151
A
Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5,000–5,500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue.
r
152
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in
the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast
into an image. White balance is fine tuned using the White
balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB
button and rotating the sub-command dial.
❚❚ The White Balance Menu
1
Select a white balance
option in the shooting
menu.
G button
To display the menus,
press the G button.
Select White balance in
the shooting menu, then highlight a white balance option and
press 2. If an option other than Fluorescent, Choose color
temp., or Preset manual is selected, proceed to Step 2. If
Fluorescent is selected, highlight a lighting type and press 2.
If Choose color temp. is selected, highlight a color
temperature and press 2. If Preset manual is selected,
choose a preset as described on page 166 before proceeding.
r
153
2
Fine tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to finetune white balance. White
balance can be fine tuned on
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and
the green (G)–magenta (M)
Coordinates Adjustment
axis. The horizontal (amberblue) axis corresponds to color temperature, with each
increment equivalent to about 5 mired. The vertical (greenmagenta) axis has the similar effects to the corresponding
color compensation (CC) filters.
Green (G)
Increase green
Blue (B)
Increase magenta
r
Amber (A)
Magenta (M)
Increase blue
3
Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to
the shooting menu. If white balance
has been fine-tuned on the A-B axis, a
E icon will be displayed in the rear
control panel.
154
Increase amber
A
White Balance Fine Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (Incandescent) is selected for white balance will make photographs
slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
A
Color Temperature Fine-Tuning
When Choose color temp. is selected, you can
view the color temperature while fine-tuning
white balance.
A
“Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in
color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
r
155
❚❚ The WB Button
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset
manual), the WB button can be used to fine-tune white balance on
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (0 154; to fine-tune white balance
when K or L is selected, use the shooting menu as described on
page 153). Six settings in both directions are available; each
increment is equivalent to about 5 mired (0 155). Press the WB
button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the rear control panel. Rotating the sub-command
dial to the left increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the
sub-command dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B).
At settings other than 0, a E icon appears in the rear control
panel.
Rear control panel
WB button
r
156
Sub-command dial
Choosing a Color Temperature
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance, color
temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and
rotating the sub-command dial. The color temperature is
displayed in the rear control panel:
Rear control panel
WB button
Sub-command dial
r
D
Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or
fluorescent lighting. Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these
sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the
selected value is appropriate.
A
The White Balance Menu
Color temperature can also be selected in the
white balance menu. Note that the color
temperature with the WB button and the subcommand dial replaces the value selected in the
white balance menu.
157
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast. Two methods are available
for setting preset white balance:
Method
Direct measurement
Copy from existing
photograph
r
158
Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under
lighting that will be used in final photograph and
white balance is measured by camera (0 160).
White balance is copied from photo on memory
card (0 164).
The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in
presets d-0 through d-4. A descriptive comment can be added to
any white balance preset (0 168).
d-0
Stores last value measured for
white balance (0 160). This
preset is overwritten when a
new value is measured.
d-1–d-4
Store values copied from d-0 (0 163).
Store values copied
from images on
memory card (0 164).
r
A
White Balance Presets
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks
(0 285). A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to
change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank
(no warning is displayed for preset d-0).
159
❚❚ Measuring a Value for White Balance
1
Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will
be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard
gray panel can be used as a reference object. In exposure
mode h, adjust exposure so that the exposure indicator shows
±0 (0 127).
2
Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until
L is displayed in the rear control panel.
Rear control panel
WB button
r
3
Main command dial
Select direct measurement mode.
Release the WB button briefly and then
press the button until the L icon in
the rear control panel starts to flash. A
flashing D will also appear in the top
control panel and viewfinder. The
displays will flash for about six seconds.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Top control panel
Rear control panel
Viewfinder
160
4
Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and
press the shutter-release button all the way down. The camera
will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset
d-0. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be
measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus.
5
Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, C will flash
in the control panels for about six
seconds, while the viewfinder will show
a flashing a.
Top control panel
Rear control panel
Viewfinder
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure
white balance. A flashing b a will
appear in the control panels and
viewfinder for about six seconds. Press
the shutter-release button halfway to
return to Step 4 and measure white
balance again.
r
Top control panel
Rear control panel
Viewfinder
161
6
Select preset d-0.
If the new value for preset white balance will be used
immediately, select preset d-0 by pressing the WB button and
rotating the sub-command dial until d-0 is displayed in the
rear control panel.
D
r
Direct Measurement Mode
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct
measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2
(Auto meter-off delay, 0 305).
A
Preset d-0
The new value for white balance will be stored
in preset d-0, automatically replacing the
previous value for this preset (no confirmation
dialog will be displayed). A thumbnail will be
displayed in the preset white balance list
(0 163).
To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has
been measured for white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance
will be set to a color temperature of 5,200 K, the same as Direct
sunlight). The new white balance value will remain in preset d-0 until
white balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the
other presets before measuring a new value for white balance, up to five
white balance values can be stored (0 163).
162
❚❚ Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1–d-4
Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white
balance from d-0 to any of the other presets (d-1–d-4).
1
Select L (Preset
manual) for White
balance in the
shooting menu.
G button
Press the G button and
select White balance in
the shooting menu. Highlight Preset manual and press 2.
2
Select a destination.
Highlight the destination
preset (d-1 to d-4) and press
the center of the multi
selector.
3
Copy d-0 to the selected
preset.
r
Highlight Copy d-0 and press
J. If comment has been
created for d-0 (0 168), the
comment will be copied to
the comment for the selected preset.
163
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1–d-4 Only)
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an
existing photograph to a selected preset (d-1–d-4 only). Existing
white balance values can not be copied to preset d-0.
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu
and press 2.
2
Select a destination.
Highlight the destination
preset (d-1 to d-4) and press
the center of the multi selector.
3
r
164
Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.
4
Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To
view the highlighted image full
frame, press the N button.
To view images in other
locations, press 1 while pressing N
and select the desired card and folder
(0 224).
5
Copy white balance.
Press the center of the multi selector to
copy the white balance value for the
highlighted photograph to the selected preset. If the
highlighted photograph has a comment (0 331), the
comment will be copied to the comment for the selected
preset.
r
A
Choosing a White Balance Preset
Press 1 to highlight the current white balance
preset (d-0– d-4) and press 2 to select another
preset.
165
❚❚ Selecting a White Balance Preset
To set white balance to a preset value:
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu and press
2.
2
Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset
and press the center of the
multi selector. To select the
highlighted preset and display
fine tuning menu (0 154)
without completing the next
step, press J instead of
pressing the center of the multi selector.
r
166
3
Select Set.
Highlight Set and press 2.
Fine tuning menu for the
selected white balance preset
is displayed (0 154).
A
Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button
At a setting of L (Preset manual), presets can also be selected by
pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial. The
current preset is displayed in the rear control panel while the WB button
is pressed.
Rear control panel
WB button
Sub-command dial
r
167
❚❚ Entering a Comment
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to
thirty-six characters for a selected white balance preset.
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu
and press 2.
2
Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset
and press the center of the
multi selector.
3
Select Edit comment.
Highlight Edit comment and
press 2.
r
4
Edit the comment.
Edit the comment as described on page
286.
168
JImage Enhancement
This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening, contrast,
brightness, saturation and hue using Picture Controls, how to
preserve detail in highlights and shadows using Active D-Lighting,
and how to choose a color space.
Picture Controls ..................................................................... 170
Selecting a Picture Control.................................................................170
Modifying Existing Picture Controls ...............................................172
Creating Custom Picture Controls ...................................................176
Sharing Custom Picture Controls.....................................................179
Active D-Lighting .................................................................. 181
Color Space............................................................................. 183
J
169
Picture Controls
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share
image processing settings, including sharpening, contrast,
brightness, saturation, and hue, among compatible devices and
software.
Selecting a Picture Control
The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls. Choose a
Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.
Option
Q
R
S
T
1
J
Description
Standard processing for balanced results.
Standard
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for
Neutral
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.
Choose for photographs that emphasize primary
Vivid
colors.
Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
Select Set Picture
G button
Control in the shooting
menu.
To display the menus,
press the G button.
Highlight Set Picture
Control in the shooting menu and press 2.
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture
Control and press J.
170
A
Preset Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera are referred to as preset
Picture Controls. Custom Picture Controls are created through
modifications to existing Picture Controls using the Manage Picture
Control option in the shooting menu (0 176). Custom Picture Controls
can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other D3S cameras
and compatible software (0 179).
A
Optional Picture Controls
Additional optional Picture Controls are available for download from
Nikon websites.
A
The Picture Control Indicator
The current Picture Control is shown in the
information display when the R button is
pressed.
Picture Control
indicator
J
171
Modifying Existing Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls
(0 176) can be modified to suit the scene or
the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced
combination of settings using Quick adjust,
or make manual adjustments to individual
settings.
1
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture
Control in the Set Picture
Control menu (0 170) and
press 2.
2
Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the
desired setting and press 4 or
2 to choose a value (0 173).
Repeat this step until all
settings have been adjusted, or
select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of
settings. Default settings can be restored by pressing the O
button.
J
3
A
Press J.
Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified from
default settings are indicated by an asterisk
(“U”) in the Set Picture Control menu.
172
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option
Manual adjustments
(all Picture Controls)
Description
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or
exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control
(note that this resets all manual adjustments). For
Quick adjust
example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes
pictures more vivid. Not available with Neutral,
Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust
sharpening automatically according to the type of
Sharpening scene, or choose from values between 0 (no
sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the
sharpening).
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to
the type of scene, or choose from values between –3
and +3 (choose lower values to prevent highlights in
Contrast
portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct
sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty
landscapes and other low-contrast subjects).
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced
Brightness
brightness. Does not affect exposure.
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust
saturation automatically according to the type of scene,
Saturation
or choose from values between –3 and +3 (lower values
reduce saturation and higher values increase it).
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make
reds more purple, blues more green, and greens more
Hue
yellow, positive values (up to +3) to make reds more
orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
Filter
photographs. Choose from OFF, yellow, orange, red,
effects
and green (0 174).
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from
B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted
Toning
monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue,
Purple Blue, Red Purple (0 175).
Manual adjustments
(non-monochrome only)
J
Manual adjustments
(monochrome only)
173
D
Active D-Lighting
Contrast and Brightness can not be adjusted when Active D-Lighting
(0181) is on. Any manual adjustments currently in effect will be lost
when Active D-Lighting is turned on.
D
“A” (Auto)
Results for auto contrast and saturation vary
with exposure and the position of the subject in
the frame. Use a type G or D lens for best
results. The icons for Picture Controls that use
auto contrast and saturation are displayed in
green in the Picture Control grid, and lines
appear parallel to the axes of the grid.
A
The Picture Control Grid
Pressing the N button in Step 2 displays a
Picture Control grid showing the contrast and
saturation for the selected Picture Control in
relation to the other Picture Controls (only
contrast is displayed when Monochrome is
selected). Release the N button to return to
the Picture Control menu.
A
J
Previous Settings
The line under the value display in the Picture
Control setting menu indicates the previous
value for the setting. Use this as a reference
when adjusting settings.
A
Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:
Y
O
R
G
Option
Yellow
Orange
Red
Green
Description
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of
the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more
contrast than yellow, red more contrast than orange.
Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced
than those produced by physical glass filters.
174
A
Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays
saturation options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust
saturation. Saturation control is not available
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.
A
Custom Picture Controls
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
J
175
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be
modified and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1
Select Manage Picture G button
Control in the shooting
menu.
To display the menus,
press the G button.
Highlight Manage
Picture Control in the shooting menu and press 2.
2
Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press
2.
3
J
176
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture
Control and press 2, or press J
to proceed to Step 5 to save a
copy of the highlighted Picture
Control without further
modification.
4
Edit the selected Picture
Control.
See page 173 for more
information. To abandon any
changes and start over from
default settings, press the O
button. Press J when settings
are complete.
5
Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the
custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9) and press 2.
6
Name the Picture
Control.
Keyboard
area
Name area
The text-entry dialog shown
at right will be displayed. By
default, new Picture
Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned
automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control.
This name can be edited to create a new name of up to 19
characters as described on page 286.
J
The new Picture Control will appear in
the Picture Control list.
177
A
Manage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any
time using the Rename option in the Manage
Picture Control menu.
A
Manage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture
Control menu can be used to delete selected
custom Picture Controls when they are no
longer needed.
A
The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by
an icon in the top right corner of the edit
display.
J
178
Original Picture
Control icon
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility
available with ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2
can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or
custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to
the memory card to be used in other D3S cameras and compatible
software and then deleted when no longer needed.
To copy custom Picture Controls to or from
the memory card, or to delete custom Picture
Controls from the memory card, highlight
Load/Save in the Manage Picture Control
menu and press 2. The following options will
be displayed:
• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory
card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera
and name them as desired.
• Delete from card: Delete selected
custom Picture Controls from the
memory card. The confirmation
dialog shown at right will be
displayed before a Picture Control
is deleted; to delete the selected
Picture Control, highlight Yes and
press J.
• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from
the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the
memory card.
J
179
A
Use Slot 1
Slot 1 is used when saving custom Picture Controls to a memory card or
copying custom Picture Controls to the camera. Cards in slot 2 can not
be used.
A
Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at
any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created
custom Picture Controls. The preset Picture Controls supplied with the
camera (Standard, Neutral, Vivid, and Monochrome) can not be
copied to the memory card, renamed, or deleted.
J
180
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high contrast
scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor
scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded
subjects on a sunny day.
Active D-Lighting off
Active D-Lighting: Y Auto
Active D-Lighting off
Active D-Lighting: P High
J
D
“Active D-Lighting” versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure
before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting
option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after
shooting.
181
To use Active D-Lighting:
1
Select Active
D-Lighting in the
shooting menu.
G button
To display the menus,
press the G button.
Highlight Active
D-Lighting in the
shooting menu and press 2.
2
Choose an option.
Highlight the desired option
and press J. If Y Auto is
selected, the camera will
automatically adjust Active
D-Lighting according to
shooting conditions (in exposure mode h, however, Y Auto
is equivalent to Q Normal).
J D Active D-Lighting
Matrix metering is recommended (0 116). When Active D-Lighting is on,
uneven shading may be visible with some subjects, noise (randomlyspaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken at
high ISO sensitivities, the capacity of the memory buffer drops, and
additional time is required to record images. Note that Active D-Lighting
is not available at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 or above. The Brightness and
Contrast Picture Control settings (0 173) can not be adjusted while
Active D-Lighting is in effect.
A
See Also
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Auto
bracketing set, 0 312), the camera varies Active D-Lighting over a
series of shots. See page 145 for more information.
182
Color Space
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color
reproduction. Choose a color space according to how
photographs will be processed on leaving the camera.
Option
W sRGB
X Adobe RGB
1
Description
Choose for photographs that will be printed or
used “as is,” with no further modification.
This color space is capable of expressing a wider
gamut of colors than sRGB, making it the preferred
choice for images that will be extensively
processed or retouched.
Select Color space in
the shooting menu.
G button
To display the menus,
press the G button.
Highlight Color space in
the shooting menu and
press 2.
2
Select a color space.
J
Highlight the desired option
and press J.
183
A
Color Space
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the
numeric values that represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB
color space is widely used, while the Adobe RGB color space is typically
used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is recommended
when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when
taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct
printing option on some household printers, or kiosk printing or other
commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed
using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2.21 and
DCF 2.0 compliant; applications and printers that support Exif 2.21 and
DCF 2.0 will select the correct color space automatically. If the
application or device does not support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0, select the
appropriate color space manually. An ICC color profile is embedded in
TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space, allowing
applications that support color management to automatically select
the correct color space. For more information, see the documentation
provided with the application or device.
A
J
184
Nikon Software
ViewNX (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically
select the correct color space when opening photographs created with
this camera.
lFlash Photography
– Using Optional Flash Units
This chapter describes how to use the camera with optional flash
units that support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS).
Using a Flash .......................................................................... 186
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ...................................187
Other Flash Units ...................................................................................189
i-TTL Flash Control................................................................. 192
Flash Modes............................................................................ 193
FV Lock .................................................................................... 196
l
185
Using a Flash
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and
can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units
can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as described
below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for flash
units with a locking pin, such as the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and
SB-400.
1
Remove the accessory shoe cover.
2
Mount the flash unit on the
accessory shoe.
See the manual provided with the flash
unit for details.
l
A
The Sync Terminal
A sync cable can be connected to the sync
terminal as required. Do not connect another
flash unit via a sync cable when performing rearcurtain sync flash photography with a flash unit
mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
186
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved
communication between the camera and compatible flash units
for improved flash photography. The camera can be used with the
following CLS-compatible flash units:
❚❚ The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:
Flash unit
Feature
Guide ISO 100
No. 3 ISO 200
SB-900 1
34/111
48/157
SB-800
38/125
53/174
SB-600
30/98
42/138
SB-400
21/69
30/98
SB-R200 2
10/33
14/46
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-900 when v or N (flash) is selected for
white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white
balance appropriately.
2 Controlled remotely with optional SB-900 or SB-800 flash unit or SU-800
wireless Speedlight commander.
3 m/ft., 20 °C (68 °F), SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position;
SB-900 with standard illumination.
❚❚ SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander:
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be
used as a commander for remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or
SB-R200 flash units. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a
flash.
l
A
Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide
Number by the aperture. For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide
Number of 38 m or 125 ft. (35mm zoom head position); its range at an
aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO
sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two
(approximately 1.4).
187
The following features are available with the SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:
Flash unit
Flash mode/feature
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
i-TTL
for digital SLR
AA
Auto aperture
A
Non-TTL auto
Distance-priority
GN
manual
M
Manual
RPT
Repeating flash
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 7
FV lock
AF-assist for multi-area AF 8
Flash Color Information
Communication
REAR
Rear-curtain sync
Y
Red-eye reduction
Power zoom
l
188
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Commander
Remote
SB-900
SB-900
SB-900
SB-800 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200
✔2
✔2
✔3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔4
✔6
—
—
—
—
✔5
✔5
✔5
—
✔5
✔5
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units.
2 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected
with flash unit.
3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.
4 Selected with flash unit. Non-TTL auto (A) selected automatically if non-CPU lens
is attached without specifying lens data using Non-CPU lens data.
5 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit. Non-TTL
auto (A) selected automatically if non-CPU lens is attached without specifying
lens data using Non-CPU lens data.
6 Selected with flash unit.
7 Select 1/250 s (Auto FP) for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 311).
8 CPU lens required.
A
Modeling Illumination
CLS-compatible flash units such as the SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 emit
a modeling flash when the camera Pv button is pressed. This feature can
be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview the total lighting
effect achieved with multiple flash units. Modeling illumination can be
turned off using Custom Setting e3 Modeling flash (0 312).
Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual
modes. If they are set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button
will lock and no photographs can be taken.
Flash unit
Flash mode
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
G Repeating flash
REAR Rear-curtain sync
SB-80DX,
SB-28DX,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24
✔
✔
✔
✔
SB-50DX
—
✔
—
✔
SB-30, SB-27 1,
SB-23, SB-29 2,
SB-22S, SB-22,
SB-21B 2,
SB-20,
SB-29S 2
SB-16B, SB-15
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash
unit to A (non-TTL auto flash).
2 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60 mm, 105 mm, or 200 mm).
l
189
D
Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras. The D3S is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and
12800. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at
some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator blinks for
about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at
full power and the photograph may be underexposed. View the
photograph in the monitor; if it is underexposed, adjust aperture, ISO
sensitivity, or the distance to the subject and try again.
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We
recommend that you select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot
and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure. The D3S supports power zoom with the
following optional flash units: the SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600. Power
zoom is not supported with other flash units.
l
190
D
Notes on Optional Flash Units (Continued)
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction in
red-eye reduction and slow sync with red-eye reduction modes, while
the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination
when the conditions for AF-assist illumination are met. When used with
AF lenses with focal lengths of 17–135 mm, the SB-900 provides AFassist illumination for all focus points; note, however, that autofocus is
available only with the following focus points:
17–19 mm
20–105 mm
106–135 mm
When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24–105 mm, the SB-800,
SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination to assist autofocus for
the following focus points:
24–34 mm
35–49 mm
50–105 mm
In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is
limited according to sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as shown below:
200
4.8
400
5.6
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
800
1600
3200
6400
6.7
8
9.5
11
12800
13
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture
is stopped down by half an f-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens
is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the
maximum aperture of the lens.
l
D
Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation,
but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before using a
Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative for more information.
191
i-TTL Flash Control
When a CLS-compatible flash unit is set to TTL, the camera
automatically selects one of the following types of flash control:
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash unit emits series of nearly invisible
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash.
Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by
1,005-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range
information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for
natural balance between main subject and ambient background
lighting. If type G or D lens is used, distance information is included
when calculating flash output. Precision of calculation can be increased
for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum
aperture; see 0 214). Not available when spot metering is used.
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in
frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into
account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized
at expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is
used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when
spot metering is selected.
l
192
Flash Modes
The camera supports the following flash modes:
Flash mode
Description
This mode is recommended for most situations. In
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto modes,
shutter speed will automatically be set to values
Front-curtain between 1/250 and 1/60 s (1/8,000 to 1/60 s with Auto FP
sync
High-Speed Sync; 0 311).
Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to
capture both subject and background at night or under
dim light. This mode is only available in programmed
auto and aperture-priority auto exposure modes. Use of
Slow sync tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by
camera shake.
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, flash
fires just before the shutter closes. Use to create effect of
a stream of light behind moving objects. In
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto, slow rearRear-curtain curtain sync is used to capture both subject and
sync
background. Use of tripod is recommended to prevent
blurring caused by camera shake.
In this mode (available only with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,
and SB-400), red-eye reduction pre-flash lights for
approximately one second before main flash. Pupils in
subject’s eyes contract, reducing “red-eye” effect
sometimes caused by flash. Owing to one-second
Red-eye
shutter-release delay, this mode is not recommended
reduction with moving subjects or in other situations in which
quick shutter response is required. Avoid moving camera
while red-eye reduction pre-flash is lit.
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. Use for
portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery.
Available only with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 in
Red-eye
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto exposure
reduction with modes. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent
slow sync
blurring caused by camera shake.
l
193
❚❚ Choosing a Flash Mode
To choose the flash mode, press
the M button and rotate the main
command dial until the desired
flash mode is selected in the top
control panel:
M button
Front-curtain sync
Slow sync 1
Red-eye reduction with
slow sync 3, 4
l
194
Main command
dial
Rear-curtain sync 2
Red-eye reduction 3
1 Available only in exposure modes e and g. In modes f and h, slow sync
becomes front-curtain sync.
2 In exposure modes e and g, flash-sync mode will be set to slow
rear-curtain sync when the M button is released.
3 Y icon blinks if flash unit does not support red-eye reduction.
4 Red-eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure
modes e and g. In modes f and h, red-eye reduction with slow sync
becomes red-eye reduction.
A
Studio Flash Systems
Rear-curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems, as the
correct synchronization can not be obtained.
A
Shutter Speed and Aperture
Shutter speed and aperture can be set as follows when an optional flash
unit is used:
Mode
e
f
g
h
Shutter speed
Set automatically by camera
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2
Value selected by user
(1/250 s–30 s) 2
Set automatically by camera
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2
Value selected by user
(1/250 s–30 s, A) 2
Aperture
Set automatically
by camera
Value selected
by user 3
See page
120
122
123
125
1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s in slow sync, slow rear-curtain
sync, and slow sync with red-eye reduction flash modes.
2 Speeds as fast as 1/8,000 s are available with optional SB-900, SB-800, and
SB-600 flash units when 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1
(Flash sync speed, 0 311).
3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity. When setting aperture
in exposure modes g and h, consult the table of flash ranges provided with
optional flash unit.
A
See Also
For information on choosing a flash sync speed, see Custom Setting e1
(Flash sync speed, 0 311). For information on choosing the slowest
shutter speed available when using the flash, see Custom Setting e2
(Flash shutter speed, 0 312).
l
195
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that
flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is
not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted
automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. FV
lock is available with CLS compatible flash units only.
To use FV lock:
1
Assign FV lock to the Fn button.
Select FV lock for Custom Setting f4
(Assign Fn button > Fn button press,
0 316).
2
Attach a CLS-compatible flash unit.
Mount an SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, or SU-800 on the
camera accessory shoe.
3
l
196
Set the flash unit to TTL or AA mode.
Turn the flash unit on and set the flash mode to TTL or AA. See
the Speedlight instruction manual for details.
4
Focus.
Position the subject in the
center of the frame and press
the shutter-release button
halfway to focus.
5
Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash ready
indicator (M) is displayed in the
viewfinder, press the Fn button. The
flash will emit a monitor preflash to
determine the appropriate flash level.
Flash output will be locked at this level
and FV lock icons (P and e) will
appear in the top control panel and
viewfinder.
6
Fn button
SHOOT
CUSTOM
Recompose the photograph.
l
7
Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.
197
8
Release FV lock.
Press the Fn button to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock
icons (P and e) are no longer displayed in the top control
panel and viewfinder.
A
Metering
The metering areas for FV lock are as follows:
Flash unit
l
Stand-alone flash unit
Used with other flash
units (Advanced
Wireless Lighting)
A
Flash mode
i-TTL
AA
i-TTL
AA
A (master
flash)
Metered area
5-mm circle in center of frame
Area metered by flash exposure
meter
Entire frame
Area metered by flash exposure
meter
See Also
For information on using the Pv or AE-L/AF-L button for FV lock, see
Custom Setting f5 (Assign preview button, 0 321) or Custom Setting
f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 321).
198
tOther Shooting Options
This chapter covers restoring default settings, making multiple
exposures, interval timer photography, and using GPS units and
non-CPU lenses.
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings................ 200
Multiple Exposure ................................................................. 202
Interval Timer Photography................................................ 208
Non-CPU Lenses .................................................................... 214
Using a GPS Unit.................................................................... 217
t
199
Two-Button Reset: Restoring
Default Settings
The camera settings listed below can be
restored to default values by holding the ISO
and WB buttons down together for more
than two seconds (these buttons are
marked by a green dot). The control panels
turn off briefly while settings are reset.
Option
Focus point
Exposure mode
Flexible program
Exposure
compensation
AE lock hold
Aperture lock
t
200
Default
Center
Programmed
auto
Off
Off
Off 1
Off
Option
Shutter-speed
lock
Bracketing
Flash mode
FV lock
Multiple
exposure
ISO WB
button button
Default
Off
Off 2
Front-curtain
sync
Off
Off 3
1 Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 321) is unaffected.
2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV
(exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). Y Auto is
selected for the second shot of two-shot ADL bracketing programs.
3 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple
exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point. Gain and
number of shots are not reset.
The following shooting-menu options will also be reset. Only
settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu
bank option will be reset (0 285). Settings in the remaining banks
are unaffected.
Option
Image quality
Image size
Default
JPEG normal
Large
Option
White balance
ISO sensitivity
Default
Auto *
200
* Fine-tuning off.
If the current Picture Control has been modified, existing settings
for the Picture Control will also be restored.
t
A
See Also
See page 392 for a list of default settings.
201
Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures
in a single photograph. Multiple exposures can be recorded at any
image quality setting, and produce results with colors noticeably
better than photographs combined in an imaging application
because they make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor.
❚❚ Creating a Multiple Exposure
Note that shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be
recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s.
A
Extended Recording Times
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, either:
• choose No limit for Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay,
0 305), or
• select On for Image review (0 281) and choose a long display time
for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay) > Image review (0 306).
The monitor-off delay will be set to a value 30 s longer than the option
selected for Custom Setting c4.
1
t
202
Select Multiple
exposure in the
shooting menu.
G button
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Multiple
exposure in the shooting menu and press 2.
2
Select a mode.
Highlight Multiple exposure
mode and press 2.
Highlight one of the following
and press J:
• To take a series of multiple
exposures, select % On
(series). Multiple exposure
shooting will continue until
you select Off for Multiple
exposure mode.
• To take one multiple exposure, select $ On (single photo).
Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have
created a single multiple exposure.
• To exit without creating additional multiple exposures, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a n icon will be displayed in
the top control panel.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
t
203
3
Choose the number of
shots.
Highlight Number of shots
and press 2.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the
number of exposures that will
be combined to form a single
photograph and press J.
A
The D Button
If Multiple exposure is selected for
Custom Setting f7 (Assign BKT button;
0 322), you can select the multiple
exposure mode by pressing the D button
and rotating the main command dial and
the number of shots by pressing the D
button and rotating the sub-command
dial. The mode and number of shots are
shown in the top control panel:
nF appears when On (series) is selected and n when On (single
photo) is selected; no icon appears when multiple exposure is off.
t
204
4
Adjust gain.
Highlight Auto gain and press
2.
Highlight one of the following
options and press J.
Option
On
Off
5
Description
Gain adjusted according to number of exposures
actually recorded (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for
2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc.).
Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure.
Recommended if background is dark.
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
In continuous high-speed and continuous lowspeed release modes (0 102), the camera records all
exposures in a single burst. If On (series) is selected, the
camera will continue to record multiple exposures while the
shutter-release button is pressed; if On (single photo) is
selected, multiple exposure shooting will end after the first
photograph. In other release modes, one photograph will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed;
continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded (for
information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all
photographs are recorded, see page 206).
t
205
The n icon will blink until shooting
ends. If On (single photo) is selected,
multiple exposure shooting ends
automatically when the multiple
exposure is complete; if On (series) is
selected, multiple exposure shooting will only end when Off is
selected for multiple exposure mode. The n icon clears from
the display when multiple exposure shooting ends.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the
specified number of exposures have been
taken, select Off for multiple exposure mode.
If shooting ends before the specified number
of exposures have been taken, a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures
that have been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will
be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded.
Note that shooting will end automatically if:
• A two-button reset is performed (0 200)
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted
• Pictures are deleted
t
206
D
Multiple Exposure
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple
exposure.
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view (0 404). Taking
photographs in live view resets Multiple exposure mode to Off.
The information listed in the playback photo information display
(including date of recording and camera orientation) is for the first shot
in the multiple exposure.
If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off
during playback or menu operations, shooting will end and a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to
that point.
A
Voice Memos
The camera stores only the last voice memo created during a multiple
exposure.
A
Interval Timer Photography
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is
taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the
number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have
been taken. The number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting
menu is ignored; to prevent interval timer shooting from ending before
all exposures are taken, either choose No limit for Custom Setting c2
(Auto meter-off delay, 0 305), or select On for Image review (0 281)
and choose a long display time for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off
delay) > Image review (0 306) to extend the monitor-off delay to a
value 30 s longer than that selected for Custom Setting c4. These
exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and interval
timer shooting will end (if On (single photo) is selected for multiple
exposure mode, multiple exposure shooting will also end
automatically). Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer
shooting.
t
A
Other Settings
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards can not be
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be
changed.
207
Interval Timer Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at
preset intervals.
D
Before Shooting
Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) or mirror up (MUP) when
using the interval timer. Before beginning interval timer photography,
take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor.
Remember that the camera will focus before each shot—no shots will
be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF.
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup
menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and
date (0 34).
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the
battery is fully charged.
1
Select Interval timer
shooting in the
shooting menu.
G button
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Interval timer
shooting in the shooting
menu and press 2.
t
2
Select a starting trigger.
Highlight one of the following
and press 2:
• To start shooting about 3 s after
settings are completed, select
Now and proceed to Step 4.
• To choose a starting time, select Start time and proceed to Step 3.
208
3
Choose a start time.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours
or minutes; press 1 or 3 to
change. The starting time is
not displayed if Now is
selected for Choose start time.
Press 2 to continue.
4
Choose an interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
hours, minutes, or seconds;
press 1 or 3 to change.
Choose an interval longer than
the slowest anticipated shutter
speed. Press 2 to continue.
5
Choose the number of
intervals and number of
shots per interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
number of intervals or number
of shots; press 1 or 3 to
change. Press 2 to continue.
t
Number of Number Total
intervals
of shots/ number of
interval shots
209
6
Start shooting.
Highlight Start > On and press
J (to return to the shooting
menu without starting the
interval timer, highlight
Start > Off and press J). The
first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time,
or after about 3 s if Now was selected for Choose start time in
Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all
shots have been taken. Note that because shutter speed and
the time needed to record the image to the memory card may
vary from shot to shot, the interval between a shot being
recorded and the start of the next shot may vary. If shooting
can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter
speed of A is currently selected in manual exposure mode
or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be
displayed in the monitor.
A
t
Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter
When taking photos without your eye to the
viewfinder, close the viewfinder eyepiece
shutter to prevent light entering via the
viewfinder from appearing in photographs or
interfering with exposure.
D
Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken. Resume shooting (0 212) after deleting some
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
210
A
Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.
If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the
bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots
specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is
active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take
one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program.
A
During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the Q
icon will blink in the top control panel.
Immediately before the next shooting interval
begins, the shutter speed display will show the
number of intervals remaining, and the
aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current
interval. At other times, the number of intervals remaining and the
number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutterrelease button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed
and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off ).
SHOOT
CUSTOM
To view current interval timer settings, select
Interval timer shooting between shots. While
interval timer photography is in progress, the
interval timer menu will show the starting time,
the shooting interval, and the number of
intervals and shots remaining. None of these
items can be changed while interval timer
photography is in progress.
t
A
Using the Monitor
Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be
adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress. The monitor
will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval.
211
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval time photography can be paused by:
• Pressing the J button between intervals
• Highlighting Start > Pause in the interval timer menu and
pressing J
• Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the
memory card can be replaced while the camera is off )
• Selecting self-timer (E) or mirror-up (MUP) release modes
• Pressing the a button
To resume shooting:
1
Choose a new starting
trigger.
Choose a new starting trigger
and start time as described on
page 208.
2
t
212
Resume shooting.
Highlight Start > Restart and
press J. Note that if interval
timer photography was paused
during shooting, any shots
remaining in the current
interval will be canceled.
❚❚ Interrupting Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is
exhausted. Interval timer photography can also be ended by:
• Selecting Start > Off in the interval timer menu
• Performing a two button reset (0 200)
• Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu (0 287)
• Changing bracketing settings (0 136)
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.
❚❚ No Photograph
Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph has yet
to be taken, the memory buffer or memory card is full, or the
camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF (note that the camera
focuses again before each shot).
A
Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the
specified number of shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high
speed) mode, photographs will be taken at a rate of up to nine shots per
second, or, if DX (24×16) is selected for Image area, at the frame rate
selected for Custom Setting d2 (Shooting speed; 0 307) > Continuous
high-speed. In S (single frame) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes,
photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2
(Shooting speed, 0 307) > Continuous low-speed; in mode J,
camera noise will be reduced.
t
A
Shooting Menu Banks
Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks
(0 285). If shooting menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting
menu item in the shooting menu (0 287), interval timer settings will be
reset as follows:
• Choose start time: Now
• Number of shots: 1
• Interval: 00:01':00"
• Start shooting: Off
• Number of intervals: 1
213
Non-CPU Lenses
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture),
the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when
using a non-CPU lens. If the focal length of the lens is known:
• Power zoom can be used with SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 flash
units (available separately)
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo
info display
When the maximum aperture of the lens is known:
• The aperture value is displayed in the top control panel and
viewfinder
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info
display
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the
lens:
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results
with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR
t
A
Focal Length Not Listed
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater
than the actual focal length of the lens.
A
Zoom Lenses
Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out.
After changing the zoom position, select new values for lens focal
length and maximum aperture.
214
❚❚ The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu
1
Select Non-CPU lens
data in the setup
menu.
G button
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Non-CPU lens
data in the setup menu and press 2.
2
Select a lens number.
Highlight Lens number and
press 4 or 2 to choose a lens
number between 1 and 9.
3
Select a focal length.
Highlight Focal length (mm)
and press 4 or 2 to choose a
focal length between 6 and
4,000 mm.
4
Select a maximum
aperture.
Highlight Maximum aperture
and press 4 or 2 to choose a
maximum aperture between
f/1.2 and f/22. The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the
combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and lens.
t
215
5
Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J.
The specified focal length and
aperture will be stored under
the chosen lens number. This
combination of focal length
and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens
number using camera controls as described below.
❚❚ Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls
1
Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera
control.
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “+command
dials” option for a camera control in the Custom Settings
menu (0 319). Non-CPU lens number selection can be
assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn
button, 0 316), the Pv button (Custom Setting f5, Assign
preview button, 0 321), or the AE-L/AF-L button (Custom
Setting f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 321).
2
t
Use the selected control to choose a lens number.
Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial
until the desired lens number is displayed in the top control
panel.
Focal
length
Main command dial
216
Maximum
aperture
Lens number
Using a GPS Unit
A GPS unit can be connected to the ten-pin remote terminal,
allowing the current latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC), and heading to be recorded with each
photograph taken. The camera can be used with an optional GP-1
GPS unit (see below; note that the GP-1 does not provide the
compass heading), or with third-party units connected via an
optional MC-35 GPS adapter cord (0 218).
❚❚ The GP-1 GPS Unit
The GP-1 is an optional GPS unit designed for use with Nikon
digital cameras. For information on connecting the unit, see the
manual provided with the GP-1.
t
217
❚❚ Other GPS Units
Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2.01 or 3.01 of the
National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format
can be connected to the camera’s ten-pin remote terminal using
an MC-35 GPS adapter cord (available separately; 0 376).
Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin
geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector.
These devices connect to the MC-35 using a cable with a D-sub
9-pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device.
See the MC-35 instruction manual for details. Before turning the
camera on, set the GPS device to NMEA mode (4800 baud).
MC-35
t
218
❚❚ The k Icon
When the camera establishes
communication with a GPS device, a k icon
will be displayed in the top control panel.
Photo information for pictures taken while
the k icon is displayed will include a page of GPS data (0 233).
GPS data are only recorded when the k icon is displayed; confirm
that the k icon is displayed before shooting (a flashing k icon
indicates that the GPS device is searching for a signal; pictures
taken while the k icon is flashing will not include GPS data). If no
data are received from the GPS unit for two seconds, the k icon
will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS
information.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
A
Heading
The heading is only recorded if the GPS device
is equipped with a digital compass (note that
the GP-1 is not equipped with a compass).
Keep the GPS device pointing in the same
direction as the lens and at least 20cm (8 in.)
from the camera.
t
A
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the
camera clock.
219
❚❚ Setup Menu Options
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.
• Auto meter off: Choose whether or not the exposure meters will
turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached.
Option
Enable
Disable
Description
Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations
are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2
(Auto meter-off delay; to allow the camera time to acquire
GPS data, the delay is extended by up to one minute after
exposure meters are activated or the camera is turned on).
This reduces the drain on the battery.
Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is
connected; GPS data will always be recorded.
• Position: This item is only available if a GPS
device is connected, when it displays the
current latitude, longitude, altitude,
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and
heading (if supported) as reported by the
GPS device.
• Use GPS to set camera clock: Select No to set the camera clock
independently of the GPS device. Note that when Yes is
selected, the time will automatically be adjusted according to
the date format, time zone, and daylight savings time options
selected in the Time zone and date menu (0 34, 330).
t
220
IMore About Playback
– Playback Options
This chapter describes how to play back photographs and details
the operations that can be performed during playback.
Full-Frame Playback.............................................................. 222
Photo Information ................................................................ 225
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback .............. 235
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ............................... 237
Protecting Photographs from Deletion ............................ 238
Deleting Photographs.......................................................... 240
I
221
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back,
K button
press the K button. The most
recent photograph will be
displayed in the monitor.
Multi selector
Sub-command dial
O button
K button
G button
N button
L button
J button
H button
Main command dial
I A Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select On for
the Rotate tall option in the playback menu
(0 282). Note that because the camera itself is
already in the appropriate orientation during
shooting, images are not rotated automatically
during image review (0 224).
222
To
View
additional
photographs
Use
Description
Press 2 to view photographs in order
recorded, 4 to view photographs in
reverse order.
Press 1 or 3 to view information
about current photograph (0 225).
View photo
information
View
thumbnails
N+
See page 235 for more information on
the thumbnail display.
Zoom in on
photograph
N+
See page 237 for more information on
playback zoom.
Delete
images
O
Record/play
voice memo
H
Change
protect
status
L
View images
in other
locations
Return to
shooting
mode
Display
menus
Confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Press O again to delete photo (0 240).
If voice memo has not been recorded,
voice memo will be recorded while H
button is pressed. If voice memo has
been recorded, pressing H button will
start playback (0 246).
To protect image, or to remove
protection from protected image, press
L button (0 238).
Choose card and folder from which
pictures are played back (0 224).
N+
/K
G
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can
be taken immediately.
I
See page 273 for more information.
223
To
Use
Play movie
Edit movie
J
Description
If current picture is marked with 1 icon
to show that it is a movie, pressing
center of multi selector starts movie
playback (0 73).
Create edited copy of current movie
(0 74).
A
Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 281),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting
(because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not
rotated automatically during image review). In single-frame, quiet
shutter-release, self-timer, and mirror-up release modes, photographs
are displayed one at a time as they are taken. In continuous release
mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in
the current series displayed.
A
Two Memory Cards
Holding the N button and pressing 1 in fullframe or thumbnail playback displays the menu
shown at right. Highlight the desired slot and
press 2 to display a list of folders, then highlight
a folder and press J to view the pictures in the
selected folder. The same method can be used
to choose a slot when selecting images for
operations in the playback (0 274) or retouch menus (0 341) or when
choosing an image as the source for preset white balance (0 165).
A
I
See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when
no operations are performed, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off
delay, 0 306).
The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed, so that the 1
and 3 buttons display other images and the 4 and 2 buttons control
photo information. See Custom Setting f3 (Photo info/playback,
0 315) for details.
224
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. There are up to 9 pages of information for each
photo. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown
below. Note that shooting data, RGB histograms, and highlights
are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Display
mode (0 277; shooting data page 4 is only displayed if copyright
information was recorded with the photograph as described on
page 335). GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used
when the photo was taken.
1/ 10
1/ 10
N I KON D3S
LAT I TUDE
LONGI TUDE
1/ 125 F5. 6
AUTO
100NCD3S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 04/ 2009 10: 15: 00
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
File information
200
85mm
ALT I TUDE
T I ME (UTC)
: 105. 17º
HEADING
0, 0
100NCD3S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 04/ 2009 10: 15: 00
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
:N
: 35º 35. 971'
:E
: 13 9º 43. 696'
: 35m
: 15 / 04 /2009
: 01 : 15 : 00
N I KON D3S
Overview data
100-1
GPS data
100-1
Highlights
I
MTR, SPD, AP.
EXP. MODE, I SO
, EXP. TUN I NG
FOCAL LENGTH
LENS
AF / VR
FLASH MODE,
: , 1/ 125 , F5. 6
: , 200
: 0. 0 , +1/ 6
: 85mm
: 85
/ 1. 4
:S
:
ARTI ST
: NIKON TARO
COPYRI GHT
: NI KON
100-1
N I KON D3S
RGB histogram
100-1
Shooting data pages 1–3
N I KON D3S
100-1
Shooting data page 4
225
❚❚ File Information
1
2
3
4
5
6
1/ 10
15
14
13
100NCD3S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 04/ 2009 10: 15: 00
12
11
10 9
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
8
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Voice memo icon...................................246
Protect status .........................................238
Retouch indicator .................................341
Focus point 1, 2.......................................... 94
AF-area brackets 1 .............................41, 59
Frame number/total number of frames
Image quality........................................... 83
Image size................................................. 86
Image area 3.............................................. 78
Image authentication ..........................334
Time of recording.................................... 34
Date of recording .................................... 34
Slot number.............................................. 37
Folder name ...........................................288
File name.................................................290
1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Display mode (0 277).
2 If photograph was taken in focus mode S, display shows point where focus first locked.
In focus mode C, focus point is only displayed if single-point or dynamic area was
selected for AF-area mode and camera was able to focus.
3 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for the
Image area option (0 78) in the shooting menu.
I
226
❚❚ Highlights 1
1
2
3
4
5
100-1
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Voice memo icon..................................246
Protect status ........................................ 238
Retouch indicator................................. 341
Image highlights 2
Folder number–frame number 3 ...... 288
Highlight display indicator ................277
Current channel 2
1 Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode (0 277).
2 Blinking areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
N button
overexposed) for current channel. Press 4 or 2
while pressing N button to cycle through channels
as follows:
RGB
(all channels)
R
(red)
G
(green)
B
(blue)
3 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for the
Image area option (0 78) in the shooting menu.
I
227
❚❚ RGB Histogram 1
5 White balance........................................150
Color temperature ................................157
White balance fine-tuning .................153
9
Preset manual........................................158
10
6 Current channel 2
100-1
11
7 Retouch indicator .................................341
8 Histogram (RGB channel) 4. In all
histograms, horizontal axis gives pixel
7
brightness, vertical axis number of
pixels.
9 Histogram (red channel) 4
Image highlights 2
4
Folder number–frame number 3 ...... 288 10 Histogram (green channel)
Voice memo icon.................................. 246 11 Histogram (blue channel) 4
Protect status ........................................ 238
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (0 277).
2 Blinking areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
N button
overexposed) for current channel. Press 4 or 2
while pressing N button to cycle through channels
as follows:
RGB
(all channels)
R
G
(red)
(green)
Highlight display off
B
(blue)
3 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for the
Image area option (0 78) in the shooting menu.
I
228
4 Some sample histograms are shown below:
• If the image contains objects with a wide
range of brightnesses, the distribution of
tones will be relatively even.
• If the image is dark, tone distribution will
be shifted to the left.
• If the image is bright, tone distribution
will be shifted to the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can
provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it
difficult to see photographs in the monitor.
A
Playback Zoom
To display an RGB histogram for the area visible
in the monitor, press the N button, rotate the
main command dial to the right, and then
release the N button. Use the multi selector to
view other areas of the image; to zoom out, press
the N button and rotate the main command
dial to the left.
I
A
Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications.
229
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 1 1
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
MTR, SPD, AP.
EXP. MODE, I SO
, EXP. TUN I NG
FOCAL LENGTH
LENS
AF / VR
FLASH MODE,
N I KON D3S
11
1
2
3
4
3
: , 1/ 8000 , F2. 8
: , Hi 0. 3
: + 1. 3, +5 / 6
: 85mm
: 85
/ 1. 4
:C
: Optional, TTL, +1. 0
SLOW
100-1
12 13
Voice memo icon.................................. 246
Protect status ........................................ 238
Retouch indicator................................. 341
Metering method................................. 116
Shutter speed .............................. 122, 126
Aperture ........................................ 123, 126
5 Exposure mode......................................118
ISO sensitivity 2 ......................................110
6 Exposure compensation .....................134
Optimal exposure tuning 3 .................304
7 Focal length............................................370
8 Lens data.................................................214
9 Focus mode .............................................. 90
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 4 ..........366
10 Flash mode .............................................193
Flash compensation
Commander mode 5
11 Camera name
12 Image area 6.............................................. 78
13 Folder number–frame number 6 .......288
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 277).
2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
3 Displayed if Custom Setting b6 (Fine tune optimal exposure, 0 304) has been set to
a value other than zero for any metering method.
4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
5 Displayed only if optional flash unit (SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200) is used.
6 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for
the Image area option (0 78) in the shooting menu.
I
230
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 2 1
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2
WHI T E BAL.
COLOR SPACE
PI CTURE CTRL
QUICK ADJUST
SHARPENING
CONTRAST
BRI GHTNESS
SATURATION
HUE
N I KON D3S
13
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
: AUTO, 0 , 0
: sRGB
: STANDARD
:0
:3
:0
:0
:0
:0
100-1
14 15
Voice memo icon.................................. 246
Protect status ........................................ 238
Retouch indicator................................. 341
White balance ....................................... 150
Color temperature................................ 157
White balance fine-tuning................. 153
Preset manual ....................................... 158
5 Color space .............................................183
6 Picture Control.......................................170
7 Quick adjust 2 .........................................173
Original Picture Control 3 ....................170
8 Sharpening.............................................173
9 Contrast...................................................173
10 Brightness...............................................173
11 Saturation 4 .............................................173
Filter effects 5..........................................173
12 Hue 4 .........................................................173
Toning 5....................................................173
13 Camera name
14 Image area 6.............................................. 78
15 Folder number–frame number 6 .......288
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 277).
Standard and Vivid Picture Controls only.
Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.
Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.
Monochrome Picture Controls only.
Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for
the Image area option (0 78) in the shooting menu.
I
231
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 3 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NOI SE REDUC.
ACT. D- L I GHT .
V IGNETT E CTRL
RETOUCH
8
COMMENT
: HI I SO/ LONG EXP.
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
: D- L I GHT ING
: WARM F I LTER
: CYANOTYPE
: TR I M
: SPR ING HAS COME. SP
R ING HAS COME. 3636
N I KON D3S
100-1
9
10 11
1 Voice memo icon.................................. 246
2 Protect status ........................................ 238
3 Retouch indicator .................................341
4 High ISO noise reduction ....................291
Long exposure noise reduction.........291
5 Active D-Lighting..................................181
6 Vignette control ....................................290
7 Retouch history .....................................341
8 Image comment....................................331
9 Camera name
10 Image area 2.............................................. 78
11 Folder number–frame number 2 .......288
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 277).
2 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for
the Image area option (0 78) in the shooting menu.
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 4 1
1
2
3
4
ARTIST
: NIKON TARO
5
COPYRI GHT
: NI KON
N I KON D3S
6
100-1
7 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Voice memo icon ..................................246
Protect status .........................................238
Retouch indicator .................................341
Name of photographer .......................335
Copyright holder...................................335
Camera name
Image area 2.............................................. 78
Folder number–frame number 2 .......288
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0 277) and copyright
information was appended to photograph (0 335).
2 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for
the Image area option (0 78) in the shooting menu.
I
232
❚❚ GPS Data 1
1
2
3
4
LAT I TUDE
5
LONGI TUDE
6
7
ALT I TUDE
T I ME (UTC)
8
HEADING
N I KON D3S
9
:N
: 35º 35. 971'
:E
: 13 9º 43. 696'
: 35m
: 15 / 04 /2009
: 01 : 15 : 00
: 105. 17º
100-1
10 11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Voice memo icon ..................................246
Protect status .........................................238
Retouch indicator .................................341
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
Heading 2
Camera name
Image area 3.............................................. 78
Folder number–frame number 3 .......288
1 Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (0 217).
2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass.
3 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for
the Image area option (0 78) in the shooting menu.
I
233
❚❚ Overview Data
1
2 3
1/ 10
4
N I KON D3S
5
6
17
16
15
14
13
–1. 3
12
AUTO 0 , 0
1
2
3
4
5
1/ 8000 F2. 8
Hi 0. 3
+ 1. 0
SLOW
100NCD3S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 04/ 2009 10: 15: 00
85mm
N
7
8
9
10
11
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
Frame number/total number of frames
Voice memo icon.................................. 246
Protect status ........................................ 238
Camera name
Retouch indicator................................. 341
6 Histogram showing the distribution of
tones in the image (0 229). Horizontal
axis corresponds to pixel brightness,
vertical axis shows number of pixels of
each brightness in image.
7 ISO sensitivity 1 ......................................110
8 Focal length............................................370
9 GPS data indicator ................................217
10 Image comment indicator..................331
11 Flash mode .............................................193
12 Flash compensation
13 Exposure compensation .....................134
14 Metering method .................................116
15 Exposure mode......................................118
16 Shutter speed ...............................122, 126
17 Aperture.........................................123, 126
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
1/ 10
30
29
28
–1. 3
I
1/ 8000 F2. 8
Hi 0. 3
+ 1. 0
SLOW
AUTO 0 , 0
100NCD3S DSC_0001. JPG
15/ 04/ 2009 10: 15: 00
27
N I KON D3S
26 25
24 23
85mm
N
20
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
22
18
19
21
18 Picture Control 2 .................................... 170
19 Active D-Lighting ................................ 181
20 File name ................................................ 290
Image quality........................................... 83
Image size................................................. 86
Image area 3.............................................. 78
Image authentication indicator ........334
Time of recording.................................... 34
Folder name ...........................................288
Date of recording .................................... 34
Slot number ............................................. 37
White balance........................................150
Color temperature ................................157
White balance fine-tuning .................153
Preset manual........................................158
30 Color space .............................................183
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2 -- is displayed if photo was taken using optional Picture Control (0 171) that is no
longer stored in camera.
3 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for the
Image area option (0 78) in the shooting menu.
234
Viewing Multiple Images:
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact
sheets” of four, nine, or 72
images, press the N button
and rotate the main command
dial.
N button
Full-frame
playback
Main command
dial
Thumbnail playback
The following operations can be performed:
To
Display more
images
Display fewer
images
Toggle full
frame playback
Highlight
images
Use
N+
N+
Description
Press N button and rotate main
command dial to left to increase
number of images displayed.
Press N button and rotate main
command dial to right to reduce
number of images displayed. If four
images are displayed, highlighted
image will be displayed full frame.
Press center of multi selector to
switch back and forth between full
frame and thumbnail playback.
Use multi selector to highlight
images for full-frame playback,
playback zoom (0 237), or deletion
(0 240).
I
235
To
Page through
images
Delete
highlighted
photo
Record/play
voice memo
Change protect
status of
highlighted
photo
View images in
other locations
Return to
shooting mode
Display menus
Use
Description
Press N button and rotate subcommand dial to scroll through
images a page at a time.
N+
O
See page 240 for more information.
H
See page 246 for more information.
L
See page 238 for more information.
Choose card and folder from which
pictures are played back (0 224).
N+
/K
G
Monitor will turn off. Photographs
can be taken immediately.
See page 273 for more information.
I
A
See Also
For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi
selector, see Custom Setting f1 (Multi selector center button, 0 314).
236
Taking a Closer Look:
Playback Zoom
Press the N button and rotate the main command dial right to
zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the
image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback.
The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:
To
Use
N+
Zoom in
or out
N+
View
other
areas of
image
Use multi selector to view area not visible
in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to
scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.
N+
View
other
images
Change
protect
status
Return to
shooting
mode
Display
menus
Description
Press N button to
display frame
showing area
currently zoomed in.
While N button is
pressed, main
command dial can be used to control size
of frame—rotate dial left to zoom out,
right to zoom 36×24 (3 : 2) format images
in up to 27 × (large images), 20 × (medium
images) or 13 × (small images). Release N
button to magnify selected area to fill
monitor.
Rotate main command dial to view same
location in other images at current zoom
ratio.
L
/K
G
I
See page 238 for more information.
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be
taken immediately.
See page 273 for more information.
237
Protecting Photographs from
Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the L button can
be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion.
Protected files can not be deleted using the O button or the
Delete option in the playback menu. Note that protected images
will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 39, 326).
To protect a photograph:
1
Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2
I
238
Press the L button.
The photograph will be
marked with a a icon. To
remove protection from
the photograph so that it
can be deleted, display
L button
the photograph or
highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the L
button.
A
Voice Memos
Changes to the protect status of images also apply to any voice memos
that may have been recorded with the images. Voice memo overwrite
status can not be set separately.
A
Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L and O buttons
together for about two seconds.
I
239
Deleting Photographs
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. To delete
multiple selected photographs or all photographs in the current
playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once
deleted, photographs can not be recovered. Note that pictures that
are protected or hidden can not be deleted.
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.
1
Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2
Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
O button
I
240
Full-frame playback
Thumbnail playback
To delete the photograph, press the O button
again. To exit without deleting the
photograph, press the K button.
O button
A
See Also
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the
next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted
(0 281).
A
Voice Memos
If a voice memo has been recorded with the
selected image, the confirmation dialog shown
at right will be displayed when the O button is
pressed.
• Image/sound: Select this option and press
the O button to delete both photo and voice
memo.
• Sound only: Select this option and press the O button to delete only
the voice memo.
To exit without deleting either voice memo or photo, press K.
I
241
The Playback Menu
Select Delete in the playback menu to delete pictures and their
associated voice memos. Note that depending on the number of
images, some time may be required for deletion.
Option
Description
Q Selected Delete selected pictures.
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
R All
playback (0 275). If two cards are inserted, you can select
the card from which pictures will be deleted.
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1
Choose Selected for
the Delete option in
the playback menu.
G button
Press the G button and
select Delete in the
playback menu. Highlight
Selected and press 2.
2
I
242
Highlight a picture.
Use the multi selector to
highlight a picture (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the N button;
to view images in other
locations, press 1 while pressing the N button and select
the desired card and folder as described on page 224).
3
Select the highlighted
picture.
Press the center of the multi
selector to select the
highlighted picture. Selected
pictures are marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select
additional pictures; to deselect a picture, highlight it and press
the center of the multi selector.
4
Press J to complete the
operation.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and
press J.
I
243
I
244
eVoice Memos
– Recording and Playback
The camera is equipped with a built-in microphone, allowing voice
memos to be added to photographs. Voice memos can be played
back over the camera’s built-in speaker.
Recording Voice Memos ...................................................... 246
Playing Voice Memos............................................................ 251
e
245
Recording Voice Memos
Voice memos up to sixty seconds long can be added to
photographs using the built-in microphone.
Readying the Camera for Recording
Before recording voice memos, adjust settings using the Voice
memo options item in the setup menu.
❚❚ Voice Memo
This option controls whether voice memos
are recorded automatically or manually. The
following options are available:
Option
7 Off
On
8 (Auto and
manual)
9
e
246
Manual
only
Description
Voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode.
Selecting this option displays
menu shown at right; select
maximum recording time
from 5, 10, 20, 30, 45, or 60 s.
Unless On is selected for
Image review in playback
menu (0 281), recording will
begin when shutter-release button is released after
shooting. Recording ends when H button is pressed
or after specified recording time has ended.
Memo can be recorded for most recent photograph
by pressing and holding H button (0 248).
❚❚ Voice Memo Overwrite
This option controls whether the voice
memo for the most recent photograph can
be overwritten in shooting mode. The
following options are available:
Option
Description
Voice memo can not be recorded in
Disable shooting mode if one already exists for
most recent image.
Voice memo can be recorded in
shooting mode even if one already
Enable exists for most recent image (0 248).
Existing memo will be deleted and
replaced by new memo.
❚❚ Voice Memo Button
This option controls manual recording. The
following options are available:
Option
Description
Voice memo is recorded while H
Press and
!
button is held down. Recording
hold
will end automatically after 60 s.
Recording begins when H
Press to button is pressed and ends
$ start/
when H button is pressed again.
Recording will end
stop
automatically after 60 s.
A
Voice Memo
The option selected for Voice memo is indicated by an icon in the rear
control panel.
On (auto and manual)
e
Manual only
247
Automatic Recording (Shooting Mode)
If On (Auto and manual) is selected for Voice memo (0 246),
a voice memo will be added to the most recent photograph when
shooting ends. Recording will end when the H button is pressed
or after the specified recording time has ended.
Manual Recording (Shooting Mode)
If On (Auto and manual) or Manual only is
selected for Voice memo (0 246), a voice
memo can be recorded for the most recent
photograph by pressing and holding the H
button. A voice memo will be recorded while
the button is held down (note that no voice
memo will be recorded if the H button is not
held down for at least one second).
H button
D
e
Automatic Recording
Voice memos will not be recorded automatically if On is selected for the
Image review option (0 281) in the playback menu. A voice memo can
however be added to the photograph displayed during image review
even if Off is selected for Voice memo.
D
Slot 2
If two memory cards are inserted and Backup or RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2
is selected for the Slot 2 option (0 88) in the shooting menu, voice
memos will be associated with the images recorded to the memory card
in slot 1.
248
Playback Mode
To add a voice memo to the photograph currently displayed in
full-frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list (0 222,
235):
1
Choose a photograph.
Display or highlight the photograph.
Only one voice memo can be recorded
per image; additional voice memos can
not be recorded for images already
marked with a h icon.
2
Press and hold the H button.
A voice memo will be recorded while the
H button is held down (note that no
voice memo will be recorded if the H
button is not held down for at least one
second).
H button
A
During Recording
During recording, the C icons in the rear
control panel will blink. A countdown timer
in the rear control panel shows the length of
the voice memo that can be recorded (in
seconds).
In playback mode, a C icon is displayed in the
monitor during recording.
Rear control panel
e
249
A
Interrupting Recording
Recording will end automatically if:
• The G button is pressed to display the menus
• The K button is pressed
• The shutter-release button is pressed halfway
• The camera is turned off
During interval timer photography, recording will end automatically
about two seconds before the next photograph is taken.
A
After Recording
If a voice memo has been recorded for the
most recent photograph, a C icon will be
displayed in the rear control panel.
Rear control panel
If a voice memo exists for the photograph
currently selected in playback mode, a h icon
will be displayed in the monitor.
A
Voice Memo File Names
Voice memos are stored as WAV files with names of the form
“xxxxnnnn.WAV,” where “xxxxnnnn” is a file name copied from the image
with which the voice memo is associated. For example, the voice memo
for the image “DSC_0002.JPG” would have the file name
“DSC_0002.WAV.” Voice memo file names can be viewed on a computer.
e
250
Playing Voice Memos
Voice memos can be played back over the
camera’s built-in speaker when the
associated image is viewed in full-frame
playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list
(0 222, 235). The presence of a voice memo
is indicated by an h icon.
To
Press
Start/end
playback
H
Delete
voice
memo
O
A
Description
Press H to start playback. Playback will end when H
button is pressed again or entire memo has been
played back.
Confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
highlight option, press O to
select.
• Image/sound: Delete both
photo and voice memo.
• Sound only: Delete voice memo
only.
To exit without deleting image or voice memo, press
the K button.
Interrupting Playback
Playback will end automatically if:
• The G button is pressed to display the menus
• The monitor is turned off by pressing the K button or by pressing the
shutter-release button halfway
• The camera is turned off
• Another image is selected
e
251
Voice Memo Playback Options
The Voice memo options > Audio output
item in the setup menu controls whether
voice memos are played back over the
camera’s built-in speaker or by a device to
which the camera is connected via an HDMI
or audio/video cable. When sound is played
back over the built-in speaker, the Audio
output option also controls playback
volume.
Option
%
Via speaker
Description
Voice memos are played
back over built-in speaker.
Selecting this option
displays menu shown at
right. Press 1 or 3 to
change volume. Beep will
sound when option is
selected. Press J to make selection and return to
setup menu.
HDMI/audioAudio signal output to HDMI or A/V-OUT terminal.
video output
Voice memos are not played back. b icon is
( Off
displayed when photo for which voice memo exists
is viewed in monitor.
&
e
252
QConnections
– Connecting to External Devices
This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer,
how to print pictures, and how to view them on a television set.
Connecting to a Computer .................................................. 254
Direct USB Connection ........................................................................255
Wireless and Ethernet Networks ......................................................257
Printing Photographs ........................................................... 258
Connecting the Printer ........................................................................259
Printing Pictures One at a Time ........................................................260
Printing Multiple Pictures ...................................................................263
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set...........................................267
Viewing Photographs on TV ............................................... 269
Standard Definition Devices..............................................................269
High-Definition Devices......................................................................271
Q
253
Connecting to a Computer
This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E4 USB cable to
connect the camera to a computer. Before connecting the camera,
install Nikon Transfer and ViewNX from the supplied Software
Suite CD (see the Software Installation Guide for more information).
Nikon Transfer starts automatically when the camera is connected
and is used to copy photographs to the computer, where they can
be viewed using ViewNX (Nikon Transfer can also be used to back
up photographs and embed information in photographs as they
are transferred, while ViewNX can be used to sort photographs,
convert images to different file formats, process NEF/RAW
photographs, and modify NEF/RAW, TIFF, and JPEG images). To
ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera
battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use
or use an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately).
❚❚ Supported Operating Systems
The supplied software can be used with computers running the
following operating systems:
• Windows: Windows Vista Service Pack 2 (Home Basic/
Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate; runs in 32-bit
emulation mode under 64-bit versions) and Windows XP Service
Pack 3 (Home Edition/Professional)
• Macintosh: Mac OS X (version 10.3.9, 10.4.11, or 10.5.7)
See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on
supported operating systems.
Q
D
Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface
cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
254
Direct USB Connection
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Turn the computer on.
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.
3
Connect the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the connectors at an angle.
D
USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
D
The USB Cable Clip
To prevent cable from being disconnected, attach the clip as
shown.
Q
255
4
Turn the camera on.
5
Transfer photographs.
Nikon Transfer will start automatically;
click the Start Transfer button to
transfer photographs (for more
information on using Nikon Transfer,
select Nikon Transfer help from the
Nikon Transfer Help menu).
6
Start Transfer button
Turn the camera off.
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when
transfer is complete.
D
During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while
transfer is in progress.
D
Close the Connector Cover
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use.
Foreign matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.
Q
256
Wireless and Ethernet Networks
If the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter (0 372) is attached,
photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or
Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from
network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 (available
separately). The WT-4 can be used in any of the following modes:
Mode
Function
Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp
Transfer mode
server.
Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before
select mode upload.
Control camera from computer using
PC mode
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately).
Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network
Print mode
computer.
For more information, see the WT-4 user’s manual. Be sure to
update to the latest versions of the WT-4 firmware and supplied
software.
A
Camera Control Pro 2
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; 0 375) can be used to
control the camera from a computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is
running, “c” will be displayed and the exposure indicator will blink in
the top control panel.
A
Movies
The WT-4 can be used to upload movies in transfer mode if Auto send
or Send folder is not selected for Transfer settings. Movies can not be
uploaded in thumbnail select mode.
A
WT-4A/B/C/D/E
The principal difference between the WT-4 and WT-4A/B/C/D/E is in the
number of channels supported; unless otherwise stated, all references
to the WT-4 also apply to the WT-4A/B/C/D/E.
Q
257
Printing Photographs
To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via direct
USB connection, follow the steps below.
Take photographs
Select photographs for printing using
Print set (DPOF) (0 267)
Connect camera to printer (0 259)
Print photographs
one at a time (0 260)
Print multiple
photographs (0 263)
Create index prints
(0 266)
Disconnect USB cable
D
Selecting Photographs for Printing
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB)
(0 83) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
retouch menu (0 353).
A
Q
Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-6 AC adapter.
When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection, set
Color space to sRGB (0 183).
A
See Also
See page 407 for information on what to do if an error occurs during
printing.
258
Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Connect the USB cable.
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do
not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
D
USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
3
Turn the camera on.
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed
by a PictBridge playback display.
q
w
Q
259
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1
Select a picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional
pictures. Press 1 or 3 to view
photo information (0 225), or
press the N button and rotate
the main command dial right
to zoom in on the current frame (0 237). Press K to return to
full-frame playback. To view six pictures at a time, press the
center of the multi selector. Use the multi selector to highlight
pictures, or press the center of the multi selector again to
display the highlighted picture full frame. To view images in
other locations, press 1 while pressing N and select the
desired card and folder as described on page 224.
2
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge
printing options.
Q
260
3
Adjust printing options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.
Option
Description
Menu shown at right will be
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
choose page size (to print at
Page size default page size for current
printer, select Printer default),
then press J to select and return
to previous menu.
Menu shown at right will be
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
No. of choose number of copies
copies (maximum 99), then press J to
select and return to previous
menu.
Menu shown at right will be
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
choose print style from Printer
default (default for current
Border
printer), Print with border (print
photo with white border), or No
border, then press J to select
and return to previous menu.
Menu shown at right will be
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
choose Printer default (default
for current printer), Print time
Time stamp
stamp (print time and date of
recording on photo), or No time
stamp, then press J to select
and return to previous menu.
Q
261
Option
Description
Menu shown at right will be
displayed. To exit without
cropping picture, highlight No
cropping and press J. To crop
picture, highlight Crop and press
2.
Cropping
If Crop is selected, dialog shown
at right will be displayed. Rotate
main command dial to left to
increase size of crop, right to
decrease. Choose position of
crop using multi selector and
press J.
A
Page Size, Border, Time Stamp, and Cropping
Choose printer default to print at current printer settings. Only
options supported by the current printer can be selected. Note
that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes.
4
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press
J to start printing. To cancel
before all copies have been
printed, press J.
Q
262
Printing Multiple Pictures
1
Display the PictBridge
menu.
G button
Press the G button in the
PictBridge playback display
(see Step 3 on page 259).
2
Choose Print select or Print
(DPOF).
Highlight one of the following
options and press 2.
• Print select: Select pictures
for printing.
• Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the
Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu (0 267). The
current print order will be displayed in Step 3.
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory
card, select Index print. See page 266 for more information.
Q
263
3
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures on the
memory card (to view images
in other locations, press 1
L button
while pressing N and select
the desired card and folder as
described on page 224). To
display the current picture full
screen, press and hold the N
button. To select the current
picture for printing, press the
L button and press 1. The picture will be marked with a Z
icon and the number of prints will be set to 1. Keeping the L
button pressed, press 1 or 3 to specify the number of prints
(up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3 when the number of
prints is 1). Continue until all the desired pictures have been
selected.
4
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge
printing options.
Q
264
5
Adjust printing options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option and press 2 to select.
Option
Description
Menu of page size options will be displayed (0 261).
Press 1 or 3 to choose page size (to print at default
Page size
page size for current printer, select Printer default), then
press J to select and return to previous menu.
Menu of border options will be displayed (0 261). Press
1 or 3 to choose print style from Printer default
Border (default for current printer), Print with border (print
photo with white border), or No border, then press J to
select and return to previous menu.
Menu of time stamp options will be displayed (0 261).
Press 1 or 3 to choose Printer default (default for
Time stamp current printer), Print time stamp (print time and date
of recording on photo), or No time stamp, then press J
to select and return to previous menu.
6
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing.
To cancel before all copies have been printed, press
J.
Q
265
❚❚ Creating Index Prints
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card,
select Index print in Step 2 of “Printing Multiple Pictures” (0 263).
Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures,
only the first 256 images will be printed.
1
Select Index print.
Highlight Index print in the
PictBridge menu (0 263) and
press 2.
The confirmation dialog shown at right
will be displayed.
2
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
3
Adjust printing options.
Choose page size, border, and time
stamp options as described on page 265
(a warning will be displayed if the
selected page size is too small).
4
Q
266
Start printing.
Highlight Start printing and press J to
start printing. To cancel before printing
is complete, press J.
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and
devices that support DPOF.
1
Choose Select/set for
the Print set (DPOF)
item in the playback
menu.
G button
Press the G button and
select Print set (DPOF) in
the playback menu. Highlight Select/set and press 2 (to
remove all photographs from the print order, select Deselect
all?).
2
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures on the
memory card (to view images in
other locations, press 1 while
L button
pressing N and select the desired
card and folder as described on
page 224). To display the current
picture in full screen, press and hold
the N button. To select the
current picture for printing, press
the L button and press 1. The
picture will be marked with a Z
icon and the number of prints will be set to 1. Keeping the L
button pressed, press 1 or 3 to specify the number of prints
(up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3 when the number of
prints is 1). Press J when all the desired pictures have been
selected.
Q
267
3
Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and
press 2 to toggle the highlighted
option on or off (to complete the print
order without including this
information, proceed to Step 4).
• Data imprint: Print shutter speed and aperture on all
pictures in print order.
• Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print
order.
4
Complete the print order.
Highlight Done and press J
to complete the print order.
D
Print Set
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and
follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the
current order (0 263). DPOF date and data imprint options are not
supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of
recording on photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge
Time stamp option.
The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the
memory card to store the print order.
Q
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW; 0 83) can not be
selected for printing using this option.
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a
computer or other device after the print order is created.
268
Viewing Photographs on TV
The supplied EG-D2 audio/video (A/V) cable can be used to
connect the D3S to a television or VCR for playback or recording. A
type C mini-pin High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI)
cable (available separately from commercial sources) can be used
to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.
Standard Definition Devices
To connect the camera to a standard television:
1
Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or
disconnecting the A/V cable.
2
Connect the supplied A/V cable as shown.
Connect to
camera
Audio (white)
Video (yellow)
Connect to
video device
3
Tune the television to the video channel.
Q
269
4
Turn the camera on and press K button.
During playback, images will be displayed both on the
television screen and in the camera monitor.
A
Video Mode
If no image is displayed, check that camera is correctly connected and
that the option selected for Video mode (0 329) matches the video
standard used in the TV.
A
Television Playback
Use of an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for
extended playback. When the EH-6 is connected, the camera monitoroff delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters will no
longer turn off automatically. Note that the edges may not be visible
when photographs are viewed on a television screen.
A
Voice Memo Options > Audio Output (0 252)
Set HDMI/audio-video output to play back or record voice memos on
the video device.
A
Slide Shows
The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for
automated playback (0 282).
A
Q
270
Audio
When a movie with sound recorded in stereo using an external
microphone is viewed on a television connected to the camera via an
A/V cable, the audio output is monaural. HDMI connections support
stereo output. Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the
camera controls can not be used.
High-Definition Devices
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C minipin HDMI cable (available separately from commercial sources).
1
Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or
disconnecting an HDMI cable.
2
Connect the HDMI cable as shown.
Connect to
camera
Connect to highdefinition device
3
Tune the device to the HDMI channel.
Q
271
4
Turn the camera on and press K button.
During playback, images will be displayed on the highdefinition television or monitor screen; the camera monitor
will remain off.
A
Q
272
Movies
To display or hide a guide in the monitor when viewing movies on an
HDMI device, press the R button.
A
HDMI
At the default setting of Auto, the camera automatically selects the
appropriate HDMI format for the high-definition device. The HDMI format
can be chosen using the HDMI option in the setup menu (0 329).
UMenu Guide
This chapter describes the options available in the camera menus.
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ....................... 274
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options....................... 284
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings......... 292
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup...................................... 325
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies........ 341
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu.............................. 359
U
273
D The Playback Menu:
Managing Images
To display the playback menu, press G and select the K
(playback menu) tab.
G button
Option
Delete
Playback folder
Hide image
Display mode
Copy image(s)
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
Print set (DPOF)
U
274
A
See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 392.
0
242
275
275
277
278
281
281
282
282
267
Playback Folder
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose a folder for playback.
Option
Description
Pictures in all folders created with the D3S will be visible during
NCD3S
playback.
All
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during
Current
playback.
Hide Image
G button ➜ D playback menu
Hide or reveal selected pictures as described below. Hidden
pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be
deleted by formatting the memory card.
D
Protected and Hidden Images
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the
image.
1
Choose Select/set.
Highlight Select/set and
press 2 (to skip the remaining
steps and reveal all pictures,
highlight Deselect all? and
press 2).
U
275
2
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures on the
memory card (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the N button;
to view images in other locations, press 1 while pressing N
and select the desired card and folder as described on page
224) and press the center of the multi selector to select the
current picture. Selected pictures are marked by a R icon; to
deselect a picture, highlight it and press the center of the
multi selector.
3
Press J.
Press J to complete the
operation.
U
276
Display Mode
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose the information available in the playback photo information
display (0 225).
1
Select options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option, then press 2 to select
the option for the photo
information display. A L
appears next to selected items;
to deselect, highlight and press 2.
2
Save changes and exit.
To return to the playback
menu, highlight Done and
press J.
U
277
Copy Image(s)
G button ➜ D playback menu
Copy photographs from the memory card in slot 1 to the memory
card in slot 2.
Option
i Select image(s)
Select destination
j folder
Copy image(s)?
1
Description
Select photographs from memory card in slot 1.
Select destination folder on memory card in
slot 2.
Copy selected photographs to specified
destination.
Choose Select image(s).
Highlight Select image(s) and
press 2.
2
Select the source folder.
Highlight the folder containing
the images to be copied and
press 2.
3
U
278
Make the initial selection.
Before going on select or
deselect individual images, you
can mark all or all protected
images in the folder for
copying by choosing Select all
images or Select protected images. To mark only
individually selected images for copying, choose Deselect all
before proceeding.
4
Select additional images.
Highlight pictures and press
the center of the multi selector
to select or deselect (to view
the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the N
button). Selected images are marked with a L. Press J to
proceed to Step 5 when your selection is complete.
5
Choose Select destination
folder.
Highlight Select destination
folder and press 2.
6
Select a destination folder.
To enter a folder number, choose Select
folder by number, enter the number
(0 288), and press J.
To choose from a list of existing folders,
choose Select folder from list, highlight
a folder, and press J.
U
279
7
Copy the images.
Highlight Copy image(s)? and
press 2.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and
press J. Press J again to exit
when copying is complete.
D
Copying Images
Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination
card. Be sure the battery is fully charged before copying movies.
If the destination folder contains an
image with the same name as one of
the images to be copied, a
confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Select Replace existing image to
replace the image with the image to
be copied, or select Replace all to
replace all existing images with the same names without further
prompting. To continue without replacing the image, select Skip, or
select Cancel to exit without copying any further images. Hidden or
protected files in the destination folder will not be replaced.
Protect status is copied with the images but print marking (0 267) is
not. Voice memos will be copied with their associated images. Hidden
images can not be copied.
U
280
Image Review
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose whether pictures are automatically
displayed in the monitor immediately after
shooting. If Off is selected, pictures can only
be displayed by pressing the K button.
After Delete
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option
Show
S
next
Show
T
previous
Description
Display following picture. If deleted picture was last frame,
previous picture will be displayed.
Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first frame,
following picture will be displayed.
If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded,
following picture will be displayed as described for Show
Continue
U
next. If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse
as before
order, previous picture will be displayed as described for
Show previous.
U
281
Rotate Tall
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for
display during playback. Note that because the camera itself is
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are
not rotated automatically during image review.
Option
On
Off
Description
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for
display in the camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for
Auto image rotation (0 332) will be displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation.
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation.
Slide Show
G button ➜ D playback menu
Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder
(0 275). Hidden images (0 275) are not displayed.
Option
Start
Frame interval
Audio playback
Description
Start slide show.
Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
Display menu of voice memo playback options
(0 283).
To start the slide show, highlight Start and
press J. The following operations can be
performed while the slide show is in
progress:
U
282
To
Skip back/skip
ahead
View additional
photo info
Press
Pause/resume
J
Exit to playback
menu
Exit to playback
mode
Exit to shooting
mode
Description
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip
to next frame.
Change photo info displayed (0 225).
Pause or resume slide show. Voice memo
playback may continue after J button has
been pressed.
G End slide show and return to playback menu.
K
End slide show and exit to full-frame (0 222)
or thumbnail playback (0 235).
Press shutter-release button halfway to return
to shooting mode.
The dialog shown at right is displayed when
the show ends. Select Restart to restart or
Exit to return to the playback menu.
❚❚ Audio Playback
Choose On to play voice memos during slide shows. The following
options will be displayed:
Option
Frame interval
Length of voice
memo
Description
Playback ends when next frame is displayed, even if
entire memo has not been played.
Next frame is not displayed until entire memo has been
played, even if frame interval is shorter than voice
memo.
Choose Off to disable voice memo playback during slide shows.
U
283
C The Shooting Menu:
Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C
(shooting menu) tab.
G button
U
284
Option
Shooting menu bank
Reset shooting menu
Extended menu banks
Active folder
File naming
Slot 2
Image quality
Image size
0
285
287
287
288
290
88
83
86
Option
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Vignette control
Long exp. NR
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Image area
78
Live view mode
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance
85
85
150
Multiple exposure
Movie settings
Interval timer shooting
A
See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 392.
0
170
176
183
181
290
291
291
110
55,
59
202
70
208
Shooting Menu Bank
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks. With the
exceptions of Extended menu banks, Interval timer shooting,
Multiple exposure, and modifications to Picture Controls (quick
adjust and other manual adjustments), changes to settings in one
bank have no effect on the others. To store a particular combination
of frequently-used settings, select one of the four banks and set the
camera to these settings. The new settings will be stored in the
bank even when the camera is turned off, and will be restored the
next time the bank is selected. Different combinations of settings
can be stored in the other banks, allowing the user to switch
instantly from one combination to another by selecting the
appropriate bank from the bank menu.
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C,
and D. A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename
option (0 286).
A
Shooting Menu Bank
The top control panel and information displays
show the current shooting menu bank.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
A
See Also
Exposure mode, shutter speed, and aperture can be included in
shooting menu banks using the Extended menu banks option in the
shooting menu (0 287). For information on using the controls on the
camera body to select the shooting menu bank, see Custom Setting f4
(Assign Fn button) > Fn button + command dials (0 318).
U
285
❚❚ Renaming Shooting Menu Banks
Selecting Rename in the Shooting menu bank menu displays the
list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1.
1
Select a bank.
Highlight the desired bank and
press 2.
2
Enter a name.
Keyboard area
To move the cursor in the name
area, press the N button and
press 4 or 2. To enter a new
letter at the current cursor
position, use the multi selector
Name area
to highlight the desired
character in the keyboard area
and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the
character at the current cursor position, press the O button. To
return to the shooting menu without changing the bank
name, press the G button.
Bank names can be up to twenty characters long. Any
characters after the twentieth will be deleted.
U
286
3
Save changes and exit.
After editing the name, press J
to save changes and exit. The
Shooting menu bank menu
will be displayed.
Reset Shooting Menu
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select Yes to restore default settings for the
current shooting menu bank. See page 392
for a list of default settings.
Extended Menu Banks
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select On to include exposure mode, shutter
speed (modes f and h only), and aperture
(modes g and h only) in the information
recorded in each of the four shooting menu
banks, to be recalled whenever the bank is
selected. Selecting Off restores the values in
effect before On was selected.
U
287
Active Folder
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.
❚❚ Select Folder by Number
1
Select Select folder by
number.
Highlight Select folder by
number and press 2. The
dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with the current slot
underlined. The current slot varies with the option selected for
Slot 2 (0 88).
2
Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change. If a
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:
• W : Folder is empty.
• X : Folder is partially full.
• Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.
3
Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the shooting
menu (to exit without changing the active folder, press the G
button). If a folder with the specified number does not already
exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent photographs will
be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full.
U
288
❚❚ Select Folder from List
1
Choose Select folder from
list.
Highlight Select folder from
list and press 2.
2
Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3
Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
shooting menu (to exit without changing the active folder,
press the G button). Subsequent photographs will be
stored in the selected folder.
D
Folder and File Numbers
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no
further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a folder
with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number
less than 999 and less than 999 images.
A
Number of Folders
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of folders.
U
289
File Naming
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in
the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space, “_DSC”,
followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter extension
(e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option is used to select
three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name. For
information on editing file names, see steps 2 and 3 of “Renaming
Shooting Menu Banks” (0 286). Note that the portion of the name
that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long.
A
Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.TIF”
for TIFF (RGB) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.AVI” for movies, and
“.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs recorded
at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images
have the same file names but different extensions.
Vignette Control
G button ➜ C shooting menu
“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph.
Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G and D lenses (DX
and PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to lens and are
most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High,
Normal, Low, and Off.
A
U
290
Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF
and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral
brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls
that have been modified from default settings may not produce the
desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.
Vignette control does not apply to multiple exposures (0 202), DXformat images (0 78), or images created with Image overlay (0 349).
Vignette control does not apply to movies and its effects can not be
previewed in live view (0 54).
Long Exp. NR
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction)
G button ➜ C shooting menu
If On is selected, photographs taken at
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be
processed to reduce noise (randomly-spaced
bright pixels or fog). The time required for
processing is roughly equal to the current
shutter speed; during processing, “l m”
will blink in the shutter speed/aperture
displays and pictures can not be taken (if the camera is turned off
before processing is complete, the picture will be saved but noise
reduction will not be performed). In continuous release mode,
frame rates will slow and while photographs are being processed,
the capacity of the memory buffer will drop.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
High ISO NR
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce noise.
Option
S High
T Normal
U Low
Off
Description
Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities over ISO
3200. While photographs are being processed, the
capacity of the memory buffer will drop. Choose the
amount of noise reduction performed from High,
Normal, and Low.
Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0.3
and higher. The amount of noise reduction is less than
the amount performed when Low is selected for High
ISO NR.
High ISO NR has no effect on movies.
U
291
A Custom Settings:
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the
A (Custom Settings menu) tab.
G button
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences.
Custom Setting groups
Main menu
U
292
B: Custom setting A: Reset custom
bank (0 294)
settings
(0 294)
The following Custom Settings are available:
B
A
a
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
a8
a9
a10
b
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
c
c1
c2
c3
c4
d
d1
d2
Custom Setting
Custom setting bank
Reset custom settings
Autofocus
AF-C priority selection
AF-S priority selection
Dynamic AF area
Focus tracking with lock-on
AF activation
Focus point illumination
Focus point wrap-around
AF point selection
AF-ON button
Vertical AF-ON button
Metering/exposure
ISO sensitivity step value
EV steps for exposure cntrl.
EV steps for exposure comp.
Easy exposure compensation
Center-weighted area
Fine tune optimal exposure
Timers/AE lock
Shutter-release button AE-L
Auto meter-off delay
Self-timer
Monitor off delay
Shooting/display
Beep
Shooting speed
0
294
294
295
296
296
298
298
299
299
300
300
301
302
302
302
303
304
304
305
305
305
306
306
307
d
d3
d4
d5
d6
d7
d8
d9
e
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
e6
f
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
f6
f7
f8
f9
f10
f11
Custom Setting
Shooting/display
Max. continuous release
File number sequence
Control panel/viewfinder
Information display
Screen tips
LCD illumination
Exposure delay mode
Bracketing/flash
Flash sync speed
Flash shutter speed
Modeling flash
Auto bracketing set
Auto bracketing (Mode M)
Bracketing order
Controls
Multi selector center button
Multi selector
Photo info/playback
Assign Fn button
Assign preview button
Assign AE-L/AF-L button
Assign BKT button
Customize command dials
Release button to use dial
No memory card?
Reverse indicators
0
307
308
309
309
310
310
310
311
312
312
312
313
313
314
315
315
316
321
321
322
322
324
324
324
A
See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 392. If settings in the current bank
have been modified from default values, an asterisk will be displayed
adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom
Settings menu.
U
293
B: Custom Setting Bank
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to
settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a
particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of
the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned
off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C,
and D. A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename
option as described on page 286.
A
Custom Settings Bank
The bank letter appears in the top control panel
and information displays.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
A: Reset Custom Settings
U
294
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select Yes to restore default settings for the
current Custom Settings bank. See page 393
for a list of default settings. Custom settings
are not reset when a two-button reset is
performed.
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls whether
Focus mode selector
photographs can be taken
whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority)
or only when the camera is in focus
(focus priority) in continuous-servo
AF. To select continuous-servo AF,
rotate the focus mode selector to C.
Option
G Release
E
Release +
focus
F Focus
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in
focus. In continuous mode, frame rate slows for
improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator
(I) is displayed.
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when the infocus indicator (I) is displayed. The camera will continue to adjust
focus until the shutter is released.
U
295
a2: AF-S Priority Selection
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls whether
Focus mode selector
photographs can be taken only
when the camera is in focus (focus
priority) or whenever the shutterrelease button is pressed (release
priority) in single-servo AF. To select
single-servo AF, rotate the focus
mode selector to S.
Option
G Release
F Focus
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator
(I) is displayed.
Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator (I) is
displayed focus will lock while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. Focus lock continues until the shutter is released.
a3: Dynamic AF Area
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic-area
AF (I; 0 92) is selected in continuous-servo AF (focus mode C;
0 90), the camera will focus based on information from
surrounding focus points. Choose the number of focus points from
9, 21, and 51 based on subject movement (note that only active
focus point is displayed in the viewfinder; the remaining focus
points provide information to assist focus operation).
Option
c 9 points
U
296
Description
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the
camera will focus based on information from the
surrounding eight focus points. Choose when there is
time to compose the photograph or when
photographing subjects that are moving predictably
(e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
Option
Description
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the
d 21 points
camera will focus based on information from the
surrounding 20 focus points. Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the
e 51 points
camera will focus based on information from the
surrounding 50 focus points. Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving quickly and
can not be easily framed in the viewfinder (e.g., birds).
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the
camera will use 3D-tracking to track the subject and
select a new focus point as required. Use to quickly
f 51 points
(3D-tracking) compose pictures with subjects that are moving
erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the
subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from
the shutter-release button and recompose the
photograph with the subject in the selected focus
point.
A
3D-tracking
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the
area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera.
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with
subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a
very small area of the frame.
A
See Also
For information on using the Fn button and command dials to select the
number of focus points for dynamic-area AF, see Custom Setting f4
(Assign Fn button) > Fn button + command dials > Dynamic AF area
(0 319).
U
297
a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large
changes in the distance to the subject during continuous-servo AF.
Option
C 5 (Long)
Description
When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the
camera waits for the specified period before adjusting
D 3 (Normal) the distance to the subject. This prevents the camera
from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by
) 2
objects passing through the frame.
E 1 (Short)
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the
distance to the subject changes. Use when
Off
photographing a series of subjects at varying distances
in quick succession.
( 4
a5: AF Activation
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Shutter/AF-ON is selected, both the
shutter-release button and the B button
can be used to initiate autofocus. If AF-ON
only is selected, autofocus is only initiated
when the B button is pressed.
U
298
a6: Focus point Illumination
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
The options in this menu control whether or not the focus points
are illuminated.
Option
Description
Manual focus Choose On to display the active focus point in manual
mode
focus mode.
Choose On to display the active focus point in CH
Continuous
(continuous high-speed) and CL (continuous low-speed)
mode
modes.
Focus point Choose the brightness of the focus point display in the
brightness viewfinder from Extra high, High, Normal, and Low.
a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the viewfinder to another.
Option
Wrap
No wrap
Description
Focus-point selection “wraps around”
from top to bottom, bottom to top,
w
q
right to left, and left to right, so that,
for example, pressing 2 when a focus
point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is
highlighted (q) selects the corresponding focus point at the
left edge of the display (w).
The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost focus
points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at
the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.
U
299
a8: AF Point Selection
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection.
Option
B 51 points
Description
Choose from the 51 focus points
shown at right.
Choose from the 11 focus points
A 11 points shown at right. Use for quick focuspoint selection.
a9: AF-ON Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the function performed when the
B button is pressed.
Option
A AF-ON
B AE/AF lock
C AE lock only
D
U
300
AE lock (Reset
on release)
Description
Pressing the B button initiates autofocus.
Focus and exposure lock while the B button is
pressed.
Exposure locks while the B button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the B button is pressed, and
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time, the shutter is released, or the exposure meters
turn off.
Option
E AE lock (Hold)
F AF lock only
Description
Exposure locks when the B button is pressed, and
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time or the exposure meters turn off.
Focus locks while the B button is pressed.
a10: Vertical AF-ON Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the function assigned to the B
button for vertical shooting.
Option
G Same as AF-ON
A AF-ON
B AE/AF lock
C AE lock only
D
AE lock (Reset on
release)
E AE lock (Hold)
F AF lock only
Description
Both B buttons perform the function selected
for Custom Setting a9.
Pressing the vertical B button initiates
autofocus.
Focus and exposure lock while the vertical B
button is pressed.
Exposure locks while the vertical B button is
pressed.
Exposure locks when the vertical B button is
pressed, and remains locked until the button is
pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or
the exposure meters turn off.
Exposure locks when the vertical B button is
pressed, and remains locked until the button is
pressed a second time or the exposure meters
turn off.
Focus locks while the vertical B button is
pressed.
U
301
b: Metering/Exposure
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select the increments used when making
adjustments to ISO sensitivity (0 110). If
possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is
maintained when the step value is changed.
If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not
available at the new step value, ISO
sensitivity will be rounded to the nearest available setting.
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select the increments used when making
adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, and
bracketing.
b3: EV Steps for Exposure Comp.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select the increments used when making
adjustments to exposure compensation.
U
302
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls whether the E button is needed to set
exposure compensation (0 134). If On (Auto reset) or On is
selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even
when exposure compensation is set to ±0.
Option
Description
Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the
command dials (see note below). The setting
selected using the command dial is reset when the
K On (Auto reset)
camera or exposure meters turn off (exposure
compensation settings selected using the E button
are not reset).
As above, except that the exposure compensation
On
value selected using the command dial is not reset
when the camera or exposure meters turn off.
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E
Off
button and rotating the main command dial.
A
Change Main/Sub
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On (Auto reset) or
On is selected for Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation)
depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f8 (Customize
command dials) > Change main/sub (0 322).
Exposure
mode
e
f
g
h
Customize command dials > Change main/sub
Off
On
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
N/A
U
303
b5: Center-Weighted Area
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
When calculating exposure, center-weighted
metering assigns the greatest weight to a
circle in the center of the frame. The
diameter (φ ) of this circle can be set to 8, 12,
15, or 20 mm or to the average of the entire
frame.
Note that unless Average is selected, the diameter is fixed at
12 mm when a non-CPU lens is used, regardless of the setting
selected for Non-CPU lens data in the setup menu (0 214). When
Average is selected, the average of the entire frame will be used for
both CPU and non-CPU lenses.
b6: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure
value selected by the camera. Exposure can
be fine tuned separately for each metering
method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.
D
Fine-Tuning Exposure
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank
and is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how
much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the finetuning menu. Exposure compensation (0 134) is preferred in most
situations.
U
304
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Off is selected, exposure only locks when
the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. If On is
selected, exposure will also lock when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose how long the camera continues to
meter exposure when no operations are
performed. The shutter-speed and aperture
displays in the top control panel and
viewfinder turn off automatically when the
exposure meters turn off.
Choose a shorter meter-off delay for longer battery life.
c3: Self-Timer
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the length of the shutter release
delay in self-timer mode.
U
305
c4: Monitor off Delay
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose how long the monitor remains on
when no operations are performed during
playback (Playback; defaults to 10 s) and
image review (Image review; defaults to 4 s)
or when menus (Menus; defaults to 20 s) or
information (Information display; defaults
to 10 s) are displayed. Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for
longer battery life. Except when image review is on, the monitor
will remain on for about ten minutes if no operations are
performed when the camera is powered by an optional EH-6 AC
adapter.
d: Shooting/Display
d1: Beep
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If High (high pitch) or Low (low pitch) is selected, a beep will sound
at the selected pitch while the self-timer is active or when the
camera focuses using single-servo AF. Note that a beep will not
sound when the camera focuses during movie recording or in
quiet-shutter release mode (mode J) or if Release is selected for
Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection, 0 296).
c appears in the top control panel and
information display when the beep is on.
SHOOT
CUSTOM
U
306
d2: Shooting Speed
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the maximum frame advance rate for CH (continuous highspeed) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes. Note that the frame
advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter
speeds, if auto ISO sensitivity control is on, or when VR (vibration
reduction) mode is used with VR lenses.
Option
Continuous
high-speed
Continuous
low-speed
Description
In CH (continuous high-speed) mode, the frame advance
rate for DX format (0 79) can be selected from 9, 10, and
11 frames per second (fps). Regardless of the setting
chosen, the maximum frame rate for other formats is fixed
at 9 fps. Note that at very small apertures (high f-numbers),
the camera may be unable to record at 11 fps.
Choose the frame advance rate for CL (continuous lowspeed) mode from values between 1 and 9 fps.
d3: Max. Continuous Release
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
The maximum number of shots that can be
taken in a single burst in continuous mode
can be set to any value between 1 and 130.
A
The Memory Buffer
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d3, shooting will
slow when the memory buffer fills. See page 420 for more information
on the capacity of the memory buffer.
U
307
d4: File Number Sequence
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
When a photograph is taken, the camera
names the file by adding one to the last file
number used. This option controls whether
file numbering continues from the last
number used when a new folder is created,
the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
J
D
Description
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or
a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering
continues from the last number used or from the largest file
On
number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a
photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created
automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.
File numbering is reset when a new folder is created, the
memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted
Off in the camera. Note that a new folder is created
automatically if a photograph is taken when the current
folder contains 999 photographs or a file numbered 9999.
Same as for On, except that the next photograph taken is
assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file
Reset
number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file
numbering is reset to 0001.
File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d4 (File number sequence) and then
either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
U
308
d5: Control Panel/Viewfinder
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the information displayed in the viewfinder and rear
control panel.
Option
Rear control
panel
Viewfinder
display
Description
Choose from ISO sensitivity (9) and Exposures
remaining (k). If Exposures remaining is selected, ISO
sensitivity will only be displayed while the ISO button is
pressed.
Choose from Frame count (l) and Exposures
remaining (k). Note that regardless of the option
selected, memory buffer capacity will be shown while
the shutter-release button is pressed.
d6: Information Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Auto (AUTO) is selected, the color of the lettering in the
information display (0 14) will automatically change from black to
white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background.
To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and choose
Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on dark (W; white
lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for
maximum contrast with the selected text color.
Dark on light
Light on dark
U
309
d7: Screen Tips
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose On to display tool tips for items
selected in the information display (0 17).
d8: LCD Illumination
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Off is selected, the control panel backlights
(LCD illuminators) will only light while the
power switch is rotated toward D. If On is
selected, the control panels will be illuminated
while the exposure meters are active (0 45).
Select Off for increased battery life.
d9: Exposure Delay Mode
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Off is selected, shutter is released when the
shutter-release button is pressed. When
shooting with Tripod selected in live view
mode (0 55) or in situations where the
slightest camera movement can blur pictures,
On can be selected to delay shutter release
until about 1 s after the shutter-release button is pressed and the
mirror is raised.
U
310
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls flash sync speed.
Option
Description
Use auto FP high-speed sync with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,
and SB-R200 flash units. If other flash units are used, shutter
1/250 s
speed is set to 1/250 s. When the camera shows a shutter
(Auto FP) speed of 1/250 s in exposure mode e or g, auto FP highspeed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is
faster than 1/250 s.
1/250 s–1/60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value.
A
Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or
manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest
possible shutter speed (30 s or bulb). An X (flash sync indicator) will be
displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel.
A
Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by
the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for
reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright
sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP” when
auto FP high-speed sync is active.
U
311
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option determines the slowest shutter
speed available when using front- or rearcurtain sync or red-eye reduction in
programmed auto or aperture-priority auto
exposure modes (regardless of the setting
chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s
in shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash
settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction
with slow sync). Options range from 1/60 s (1/60 s) to 30 s (30 s).
e3: Modeling Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If On is selected when the camera is being
used with an optional flash unit that supports
the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS;
0 187), the flash unit mounted on the
camera and any CLS-compatible remote flash
units will emit a modeling flash when the
camera Pv button is pressed (0 119). No modeling flash is emitted
if Off is selected.
e4: Auto Bracketing Set
U
312
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing
(0 136) is in effect. Choose AE & flash (j) to perform both
exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only (k) to bracket only
exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB
bracketing (m) to perform white balance bracketing (0 141), or
ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D-Lighting
(0 145). Note that white balance bracketing is not available at
image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG.
e5: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option determines which settings are affected when AE &
flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e4 in manual
exposure mode.
Option
F Flash/speed
Flash/speed/
G aperture
H Flash/aperture
I
Flash only
Description
Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e4
set to AE only) or shutter speed and flash level
(Custom Setting e4 set to AE & flash).
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom
Setting e4 set to AE only) or shutter speed,
aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting e4 set to
AE & flash).
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e4 set to
AE only) or aperture and flash level (Custom
Setting e4 set to AE & flash).
Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e4
set to AE & flash).
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control. If
a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used,
ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot, regardless
of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control (0 112).
e6: Bracketing Order
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
At the default setting of MTR>under>over (H), exposure, flash,
and white balance bracketing are performed in the order
described on pages 138 and 142. If Under>MTR>over (I) is
selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the
highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.
U
313
f: Controls
f1: Multi Selector Center Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option determines the role assigned to the center of the multi
selector in shooting and playback modes (regardless of the option
selected, pressing the center of the multi selector when a movie is
displayed full frame starts movie playback).
❚❚ Shooting Mode
Option
J Select center focus point
Not used
Role assigned to center of multi selector
Select center focus point.
None.
❚❚ Playback Mode
n
o
p
U
314
Option
Role assigned to center of multi selector
Thumbnail on/off Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback,
View histograms a histogram is displayed while the center of the
multi selector is pressed.
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback
and playback zoom. Choose the initial zoom setting
Zoom on/off
from Low magnification, Medium magnification,
and High magnification. The zoom display will
center on the active focus point.
❚❚ Live View
J
Option
Select center
focus point
p Zoom on/off
Start movie
j recording
Not used
Role assigned to center of multi selector
Pressing the center of the multi selector in live view
selects the center focus point.
Press the center of the multi selector to toggle zoom
on and off. Choose the initial zoom setting from
Low magnification, Medium magnification, and
High magnification. The zoom display will center
on the active focus point.
Pressing the center of the multi selector in live view
starts movie recording.
Pressing the center of the multi selector has no
effect in live view.
f2: Multi Selector
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Reset meter-off delay is selected,
operating the multi selector when the
exposure meters are off (0 45) will activate
the exposure meters. If Do nothing is
selected, the exposure meters will not be
activated when the multi selector is pressed.
f3: Photo Info/Playback
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Info13/Playback42 is selected, pressing
1 or 3 in full-frame playback changes the
photo information displayed, while pressing
4 or 2 displays additional images. To reverse
the role of the multi selector buttons so that
pressing 1 or 3 displays additional images
and pressing 4 or 2 changes the photo information displayed,
select Info42/Playback13.
U
315
f4: Assign Fn Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the Fn button,
either by itself (Fn button press) or when
used in combination with the command dials
(Fn button + command dials).
❚❚ Fn Button Press
Selecting Fn button press for Custom Setting f4 displays the
following options:
q
r
B
C
D
E
F
s
U
316
Option
Preview *
Description
Press the Fn button to preview depth of field (0 119).
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units only, 0 196).
FV lock *
Press again to cancel FV lock.
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is
AE/AF lock
pressed.
AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
AE lock
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
(Reset on
time, the shutter is released, or the exposure meters
release) *
turn off.
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
AE lock
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
*
(Hold)
time or the exposure meters turn off.
AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.
The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn
Flash off
button is pressed.
Option
Bracketing
t burst
Matrix
L metering
Center-
M weighted
N
metering
Spot
metering
Virtual
m horizon *
K Playback *
Access top
O item in MY
MENU *
None
Description
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure, flash, or
ADL bracketing is active in single frame or quiet
shutter-release mode, all shots in the current
bracketing program will be taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed. If white balance
bracketing is active or continuous release mode
(mode CH or CL) is selected, the camera will repeat the
bracketing burst while the shutter-release button is
held down (in single frame release mode,
photographs will be taken at about 8 fps).
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is
pressed.
Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn
button is pressed.
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is
pressed.
The exposure indicators act as a tilt meter (0 318).
Press the Fn button to toggle between exposure and
tilt meter displays.
Fn button performs same function as K button.
Select when using a telephoto lens or in other
circumstances in which it is difficult to operate the K
button with your left hand.
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY
MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a
frequently-used menu item.
No operation is performed when the Fn button is
pressed.
* This option can not be used in combination with Fn button + command
dials (0 318). Selecting this option displays a message and sets
Fn button + command dials to None. If another option is selected for
Fn button + command dials while this setting is active, Fn button press
will be set to None.
Note that none of these options can be combined with
Fn button + command dials > Dynamic AF area; see page 319.
U
317
A
Virtual Horizon
When Virtual horizon is selected for Fn button press, the exposure
indicators in the viewfinder and top control panel can be used as a
horizontal level. Press the Fn button to toggle between exposure and tilt
meter displays.
Camera tilted right
Camera level
Camera tilted left
Control panel
Viewfinder
Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at
a sharp angle forward or back.
❚❚ Fn button + command dials
Selecting Fn button + command dials for Custom Setting f4
displays the following options:
Option
Choose
i image area
U
318
Description
Press the Fn button and rotate
the main command dial to
highlight the desired image
area (0 78); press 2 to select
or deselect. Highlight Done
and press J when settings
are complete.
Option
Description
If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are
rotated, changes to shutter speed (exposure modes f
1 step spd/ and h) and aperture (exposure modes g and h) are
v aperture
made in increments of 1 EV, regardless of the option
selected for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure
cntrl., 0 302).
Choose non- Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to
choose a lens number specified using the Non-CPU
w CPU lens
number
lens data option (0 214).
Focus point- Press the Fn button and rotate the command dials for
x selection
vertical shooting to choose a focus point.
If this option is selected, the shooting menu bank can
Shooting
n menu bank be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating a
command dial.
If continuous-servo AF (focus mode C; 0 90) is selected
when dynamic-area AF (I) is chosen for AF-area mode
(0 92), the number of focus points can be selected by
Dynamic AF pressing the Fn button and rotating a command dial
I area
(0 296). The focus points used for dynamic-area AF are
displayed in the viewfinder while the Fn button is
pressed; if 51 points (3D-tracking) is selected, “3D”
will be displayed in the viewfinder.
No operation is performed when the command dials
None
are rotated while the Fn button is pressed.
❚❚ Portrait (Tall-Orientation) Photographs
To use the command dials to select the focus point when framing
shots in portrait (“tall”) orientation:
1
Choose Focus point-selection.
Select Focus point-selection for
Custom Setting f4 (Assign Fn
button) > Fn button + command
dials.
U
319
2
Unlock the shutter-release Vertical shutter-release button
lock
button for vertical
shooting.
3
Select the focus point.
With the camera in portrait (“tall”) orientation, select a focus
point by pressing the Fn button and rotating the command
dials for vertical shooting. Use the main command dial to
move the focus point selection left or right, the sub-command
dial to move it up or down.
Main command dial for vertical shooting
+
Fn button
Main command dial
for vertical shooting
Sub-command dial for vertical shooting
+
Fn button
U
320
Sub-command dial
for vertical shooting
f5: Assign Preview Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the Pv button,
either by itself (Preview button press) or
when used in combination with the
command dials (Preview + command dials).
The options available are the same as for Fn
button press (0 316) and Fn button +
command dials (0 318), except that the default option for
Preview button press is Preview and that Preview + command
dials lacks a Focus point-selection option (the default setting for
Preview + command dials is None).
f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the AE-L/AF-L
button, either by itself (AE-L/AF-L button
press) or when used in combination with the
command dials (AE-L/AF-L + command
dials). The options available for AE-L/AF-L
button press are the same as for Fn button
press (0 316), except that AE-L/AF-L button press defaults to AE/
AF lock and has an additional AF-ON option (if this option is
selected, pressing the AE-L/AF-L button has the same effect as
pressing the B button to initiate autofocus; this option can not
be used in combination with AE-L/AF-L + command dials). The
options available for AE-L/AF-L + command dials are the same as
for Fn button + command dials (0 318), except that AE-L/AF-L +
command dials defaults to None and lacks 1 step spd/aperture
and Focus-point selection options.
U
321
f7: Assign BKT Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the D button.
Option
Auto
t bracketing
Multiple
$ exposure
Description
Press the t button and rotate a command dial to
choose the bracketing increment and number of shots
in the bracketing sequence (0 136).
Press the t button and rotate a command dial to
choose the mode and number of shots for multiple
exposures (0 204).
f8: Customize Command Dials
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command
dials.
Option
Reverse
rotation
Change
main/sub
U
322
Description
Controls the direction of the command
dials. Choose No for normal command
dial operation, Yes to reverse the
rotation of the command dials. This
setting also applies to the command
dials for vertical shooting.
If Off is selected, the main command
dial controls shutter speed and the
sub-command dial controls aperture.
If On is selected, the main command
dial will control aperture and the subcommand dial shutter speed. If On
(Mode A) is selected, the main
command dial will be used to set aperture in exposure mode g
only. This setting also applies to the command dials for vertical
shooting.
Option
Description
If Sub-command dial is selected, aperture can only be
adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main
command dial if On is selected for Change main/sub). If
Aperture ring is selected, aperture can only be adjusted with
the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will
Aperture
show aperture in increments of 1 EV (aperture for type G lenses
setting
is still set using the sub-command dial). Live view is not
available when Aperture ring is selected and a CPU lens with
an aperture ring is attached. Note that regardless of the
setting chosen, the aperture ring must be used to adjust
aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached.
If Off is selected, the multi selector is used to choose the
picture displayed during full-frame playback, highlight
thumbnails, and navigate menus. If On is selected, the main
command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed
during full-frame playback, move the cursor left or right during
Menus thumbnail playback, and move the menu highlight bar up or
down. The sub-command dial is used to display additional
and
playback photo information in full-frame playback and to move the
cursor up or down during thumbnail playback. While menus
are displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays
the sub-menu for the selected option, while rotating it left
displays the previous menu. To make a selection, press 2, the
center of the multi selector, or J.
D
Live View
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring in live view,
select Sub-command dial for Aperture setting.
U
323
f9: Release Button to Use Dial
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by
holding the I, E, D, M, ISO, QUAL, or WB button and rotating a
command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the
button is released. Setting ends when any of the affected buttons
is pressed again or the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto
meter-off delay, setting will also end when the exposure meters
turn off.
f10: No Memory Card?
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded
(they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If
Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
f11: Reverse Indicators
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If
(V) is selected, the exposure indicators in the
top control panel and information display are displayed with
positive values on the left and negative values on the right. Select
(W) to display negative values on the left and
positive values on the right.
U
324
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup
menu) tab.
G button
Option
Format memory card
LCD brightness
Clean image sensor
Lock mirror up for cleaning *
Image Dust Off ref photo
Video mode
HDMI
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date
Language
Image comment
Auto image rotation
0
326
326
378
381
327
329
329
330
330
331
331
332
Option
Voice memo options
Battery info
Wireless transmitter
Image authentication
Copyright information
Save/load settings
GPS
Virtual horizon
Non-CPU lens data
AF fine tune
Firmware version
0
246
333
257
334
335
336
220
338
215
339
340
* Not available when battery is low.
A
See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 392.
U
325
Format Memory Card
G button ➜ B setup menu
To begin formatting, choose a memory card
slot and select Yes. Note that formatting
permanently deletes all pictures and other data
on the card in the selected slot. Before
formatting, be sure to make backup copies as
required.
D
During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.
A
Two-Button Format
Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the Q (O and I)
buttons for more than two seconds (0 39).
LCD Brightness
G button ➜ B setup menu
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness.
Choose higher values for increased
brightness, lower values for reduced
brightness.
A
See Also
For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view, see page
63.
U
326
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G button ➜ B setup menu
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX 2 (available separately; for more information, see the
Capture NX 2 manual).
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is
mounted on the camera. A non-DX lens with a focal length of at
least 50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all
the way in.
1
Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following
options and press J. To exit
without acquiring image dust
off data, press G.
• Start: The message shown at
right will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder and top
control panel displays.
• Clean sensor and then start: Select this
option to clean the image sensor
before starting. The message shown at
right will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder and top
control panel displays when cleaning is
complete.
D
Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken after image
sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean image sensor and
then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with
existing photographs.
U
327
2
Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a welllit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
3
Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the reference object is too bright or too
dark, the camera may be unable to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will be
displayed. Choose another reference
object and repeat the process from
Step 1.
D
Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or at
different apertures. Reference images can not
be viewed using computer imaging software.
A grid pattern is displayed when reference
images are viewed on the camera.
U
328
Video Mode
G button ➜ B setup menu
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the audio/
video (A/V OUT) connector, be sure the camera video mode
matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL).
HDMI
G button ➜ B setup menu
The camera is equipped with an HDMI (High-Definition
Multimedia Interface) connector, allowing pictures to be played
back on high-definition televisions or monitors using a cable with
a type C mini-pin connector (available separately from commercial
suppliers). Before connecting the camera to high-definition
device, choose the HDMI format from the options below.
Option
Description
The camera automatically selects the appropriate
v Auto
format.
J 480p (progressive) 640 × 480 (progressive) format
K 576p (progressive) 720 × 576 (progressive) format
L 720p (progressive) 1,280 × 720 (progressive) format
Photographs are displayed in 1,920 × 1,080
M 1080i (interlaced) (interlaced) format; movies and live view are
displayed in 1,280 × 720 format.
The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device
is connected.
U
329
Flicker Reduction
G button ➜ B setup menu
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting
under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting
during live view or movie recording. Choose
a frequency which matches that of the local
AC power supply.
D
Flicker Reduction
If you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply, test both
options and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker
reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very
bright, in which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (larger
f-number). The desired results may also not be achieved in highsensitivity movie mode or, due to the fact the selected shutter speed is
not always used, during exposure preview (0 57). To prevent flicker
during exposure preview, select mode h and choose a shutter speed
adapted to the frequency of the local power supply: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, or 1/30 s
for 60 Hz; 1/100 s, 1/50 s, or 1/25 s for 50 Hz.
Time Zone and Date
G button ➜ B setup menu
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display
order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.
Option
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set
Time zone
to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time Set the camera clock (0 34).
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
Date format
displayed.
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will
Daylight
automatically be advanced or set back one hour. The
saving time
default setting is Off.
U
330
B blinks in the top control panel when the clock is not set.
Language
G button ➜ B setup menu
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The
following options are available.
Czech
Danish
German
English
Spanish
French
Indonesian
Italian
Dutch
Norwegian
Image Comment
Polish
Portuguese
Russian
Finnish
Swedish
Turkish
Traditional Chinese
Simplified Chinese
Japanese
Korean
G button ➜ B setup menu
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX (supplied) or
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 375). The comment is also
visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information
display (0 232).
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
• Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 286.
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs. Attach comment can be
turned on and off by highlighting it and
pressing 2.
U
331
Auto Image Rotation
G button ➜ B setup menu
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically
during playback (0 282) or when viewed in ViewNX (supplied) or
in Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 375). The following
orientations are recorded:
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counter-clockwise
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose
this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens
pointing up or down.
A
Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option in the
playback menu (0 282). Note that because the camera itself is already
in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated
automatically during image review (0 224).
U
332
Battery Info
G button ➜ B setup menu
View information on the battery currently
inserted in the camera.
Item
Battery
meter
Description
The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
The number of times the shutter has been released with the
current battery since the battery was last charged. Note that
Picture
the camera may sometimes release the shutter without
meter
recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset
white balance.
• j: Due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is
required to ensure that battery level can be measured
Calibration
accurately; recalibrate battery before charging (0 417).
• —: Calibration not required.
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that
battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has
reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced.
Battery Note that fresh batteries charged at temperatures under
about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging life;
age
the battery age display will however return to normal once
the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about
20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
U
333
Image Authentication
G button ➜ B setup menu
Choose s On to embed image authentication information in
new photographs as they are taken, allowing alterations to be
detected using Nikon’s optional Image Authentication software.
Image authentication information can not be embedded in
existing photographs. Photographs taken with image
authentication on are marked with a p icon on the file information
and overview pages of the photo information display (0 226, 234).
D
Camera Control Pro 2
Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF (RGB)
photographs recorded directly to a computer using
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately).
A
Copies
Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created
using the options in the retouch menu (0 341).
U
334
Copyright Information
G button ➜ B setup menu
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken.
Copyright information is visible on the fourth shooting data page
in the photo information display (0 232) and can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX (supplied) or in Capture NX 2 (available
separately; 0 375).
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
• Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 286.
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
on page 286. Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters
long.
• Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright information to
all subsequent photographs. Attach
copyright information can be turned on
and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.
D
Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring
the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability for any
damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright
information option.
U
335
Save/Load Settings
G button ➜ B setup menu
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory
card in slot 1 (if the memory card is full, an error will be displayed;
0 405). Use this option to share settings among D3S cameras.
Menu
Playback
Shooting
(all banks)
Option
Display mode
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Shooting menu bank
Extended menu banks
File naming
Slot 2
Image quality
Image size
Image area
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance (with fine tuning and presets d-0–d-4)
Set Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Vignette control
Long exp. NR
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Live view mode
Movie settings
Custom settings
All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings
(all banks)
U
336
Menu
Option
Clean image sensor
Video mode
HDMI
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date (excepting date and time)
Language
Setup
Image comment
Auto image rotation
Voice memo options
Image authentication
Copyright information
GPS
Non-CPU lens data
All My Menu items
My Menu/
All recent settings
Recent Settings
Choose tab
Settings saved using the D3S can be restored by selecting Load
settings. Note that Save/load settings is only available when a
memory card is inserted in slot 1, and that the Load settings
option is only available if the card in slot 1 contains saved settings
(the memory card in slot 2 can not be used to save or load
settings).
A
Saved Settings
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP6. The camera will not be
able to load settings if the file name is changed.
U
337
Virtual Horizon
G button ➜ B setup menu
Display a virtual horizon based on
information from the camera image sensor.
If the camera is level, the reference line will
be displayed in green.
Reference line
D
Tilting the Camera
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a
sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the
amount of tilt will not be displayed.
A
See Also
For information on using the exposure indicators as a tilt meter, see
Custom Setting f4 (Assign Fn button > Fn button press; 0 316, 318).
For information on displaying a virtual horizon in live view, see page 62.
U
338
AF Fine Tune
G button ➜ B setup menu
Fine-tune focus for up to 20 lens types. AF tuning is not
recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal
focus; use only when required.
Option
Description
AF fine
• On: Turn AF tuning on.
tune
• Off: Turn AF tuning off.
(On/Off)
Tune AF for the current lens (CPU
Move focal
lenses only). Press 1 or 3 to choose point away
Saved a value between +20 and –20.
from camera.
value Values for up to 20 lens types can be
stored. Only one value can be
stored for each type of lens.
Choose the AF tuning value used
when no previously saved value
Default
exists for the current lens (CPU
lenses only).
Move focal
point toward
camera.
Current
value
Previous
value
List previously saved AF tuning values. If a value exists for the
current lens, it will be shown with a V icon. To delete a lens from
the list, highlight the desired lens and press O. To change a lens
identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as
the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from
other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value
List can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the
saved desired lens and press 2.
values The menu shown at right will be
displayed; press 1 or 3 to choose an
identifier and press J to save changes
and exit.
U
339
D
AF Tuning
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity
when AF tuning is applied.
D
Live View (Tripod) Mode
Tuning is not applied to contrast-detect autofocus when Tripod is
selected in live view mode (0 55).
A
Saved Value
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is
used, separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and
teleconverter.
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.
U
340
G button ➜ B setup menu
N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch
menu) tab.
G button
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed, or
retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is
inserted in the camera.
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
8
p
9
Option
D-Lighting *
Red-eye correction *
Trim
Monochrome *
Filter effects *
Color balance *
Image overlay
NEF (RAW) processing
Resize
Side-by-side comparison
Edit movie
0
344
345
346
347
348
348
349
353
355
357
74
* Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set
Picture Control (0 170).
U
341
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1
Select an item in the
retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
item, 2 to select. Depending
on the option selected, a menu
may be displayed; highlight an
option and press 2.
2
Select a picture.
The pictures on the memory
card will be displayed. Use the
multi selector to highlight a
picture (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the N button).
To view images in other locations, press
1 while pressing N and select the
desired card and folder as described on
page 224.
A
Retouch
The camera may not be able to display or
retouch images created with other devices.
U
342
3
Display retouch options.
Press J to display retouch options (see
the section for the selected option for
details). To exit without creating a
retouched copy, press G.
A
Monitor off Delay
The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are
performed for 20 s. Any unsaved changes will be lost. To increase
the time the monitor remains on, choose a longer menu display
time for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 306).
4
Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched
copy. Retouched copies are
indicated by a N icon.
D
Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and
Edit movie > Choose start point/Choose end point each option can
only be applied once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of
detail). Copies created with Trim, Resize, or Save selected frame can
not be further modified. D-Lighting, red-eye correction, filter effects, and
color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies.
A
Image Quality
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF
(RAW) processing, and Resize, copies created from JPEG images are
the same size and quality as the original, copies created from NEF (RAW)
photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images, and copies created
from TIFF (RGB) photos are saved as fine-quality JPEG images of the
same size as the original. Size-priority compression is used when copies
are saved in JPEG format.
U
343
D-Lighting
G button ➜ N retouch menu
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Before
After
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy
the photograph.
U
344
Red-Eye Correction
G button ➜ N retouch menu
This option is used to correct “red-eye”
caused by the flash and is available only with
photographs taken using a flash. The
photograph selected for red-eye correction is
previewed as shown at right. Confirm the
effects of red-eye correction and create a
copy as described in the following table. Note that red-eye
correction may not always produce the expected results and may
in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that
are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before
proceeding.
To
Use
Zoom in
N+
Zoom out
N+
View other
areas of
image
N+
Cancel zoom
J
Create copy
J
Description
Press N button
and rotate main
command dial right
to zoom in, left to
zoom out. While
photo is zoomed in,
press N and use
multi selector to view areas of image not
visible in monitor. Keep multi selector
pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of
frame. While N button is pressed, area
currently visible in monitor is indicated by
yellow border. Press J to cancel zoom.
If the camera detects red-eye in the
selected photograph, a copy will be created
that has been processed to reduce its
effects. No copy will be created if the
camera is unable to detect red-eye.
U
345
Trim
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph. The selected photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown in
yellow; create a cropped copy as described in
the following table.
To
Use
Reduce size of
crop
N+
Press N button and rotate main
command dial right to reduce the size
of the crop.
Increase size of
crop
N+
Press N button and rotate main
command dial left to increase the size of
the crop.
Rotate the main command dial to
switch between aspect ratios of 3 : 2,
4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1, and 16 : 9.
Change crop
aspect ratio
Move crop
Use multi selector to move the crop to
other areas of the image.
Preview crop
Press center of multi selector to preview
cropped image.
Create copy
U
346
Description
J
Save the current crop as a separate file.
A
Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos
have an image quality (0 83) of JPEG fine; cropped copies created from
JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original. The size of the
copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio.
Aspect
ratio
Possible sizes
3:2
4:3
5:4
1:1
16 : 9
3,424 × 2,280, 2,560 × 1,704, 1,920 × 1,280, 1,280 × 856, 960 × 640, 640 × 424
3,424 × 2,568, 2,560 × 1,920, 1,920 × 1,440, 1,280 × 960, 960 × 720, 640 × 480
3,216 × 2,568, 2,400 × 1,920, 1,808 × 1,440, 1,200 × 960, 896 × 720, 608 × 480
2,560 × 2,560, 1,920 × 1,920, 1,440 × 1,440, 960 × 960, 720 × 720, 480 × 480
3,424 × 1,920, 2,560 × 1,440, 1,920 × 1,080, 1,280 × 720, 960 × 536, 640 × 360
A
Viewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed.
Monochrome
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype
displays a preview of the selected
image; press 1 to increase color
saturation, 3 to decrease. Press J
to create a monochrome copy.
Increase
saturation
Decrease
saturation
U
347
Filter Effects
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Choose from the following color filter effects. After adjusting filter
effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.
Option
Description
Creates the effect of a skylight
filter, making the picture less
blue. The effect can be previewed
in the monitor as shown at right.
Skylight
Warm filter
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the
copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in
the monitor.
Color Balance
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Use the multi selector to create a copy with
modified color balance as shown below. The
effect is displayed in the monitor together
with red, green, and blue histograms (0 228)
giving the distribution of tones in the copy.
Press J to copy the photograph.
Increase amount of green
Increase
amount of
blue
Increase
amount of
amber
Increase amount of magenta
U
348
A
Zoom
To zoom in on the image displayed in the
monitor, press N, rotate the main command
dial to the right, and then release the N button.
The histogram will be updated to show data only
for the portion of the image displayed in the
monitor. To choose the area displayed using
zoom, press N and use the multi selector. To
exit zoom, press the N button and rotate the main command dial to
the left.
Image Overlay
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image
quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image
quality and size (0 83, 86; all options are available). To create a
NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
1
Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay and
press 2. The dialog shown at
right will be displayed, with
Image 1 highlighted.
U
349
2
Display NEF (RAW) images.
Press J to display a picture
selection dialog listing only
NEF (RAW) images created with
this camera.
3
Select a photograph.
Highlight the first photograph
in the overlay. To view the
highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the N
button. Press J to select the
highlighted photograph and return to the preview display.
4
Select the second
photograph.
The selected image will appear
as Image 1. Press 2 to
highlight Image 2 and repeat
steps 2–3 to select the second photo.
U
350
5
Set gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2
and optimize exposure for the
overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to
select the gain for image 1
from values between 0.1 and
2.0. Repeat for the second image. The default value is 1.0;
selecting 0.5 cuts gain in half, while selecting 2.0 doubles gain.
The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
6
Highlight the Preview
column.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the
Preview column.
7
Preview the overlay.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
Overlay and press J (to save
the overlay without displaying
a preview, highlight Save and
press J). To return to Step 5
and select new photos or adjust gain, press N.
U
351
8
Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is
displayed to save the overlay.
After an overlay is created, the
resulting image will be
displayed full-frame in the
monitor.
+
D
Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs created with the D3S can be selected for
image overlay. Other images are not displayed in the selection dialog.
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit-depth
can be combined.
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for
white balance and picture control as the photograph selected for
Image 1. The current image comment is appended to the overlay when
it is saved; copyright information, however, is not copied. Overlays
saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for Type in the
NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same bit depth as the
original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority
compression.
U
352
NEF (RAW) Processing
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1
Select NEF (RAW)
processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW)
processing and press 2 to
display a picture selection
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.
2
Select a photograph.
Use the multi selector to
highlight a photograph (to
view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press
and hold the N button). Press
J to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to the
next step.
U
353
3
Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.
Choose image quality (0 83), image size (0 86),
white balance (0 150), exposure compensation (0 134),
a Picture Control (0 170; note that the Picture Control grid
can not be displayed), high ISO noise reduction (0 291), color
space (0 183), and vignette control (0 290) for the JPEG copy.
Note that white balance and vignette control are not available
with multiple exposures or pictures created with image
overlay and that exposure compensation increments differ
from those used in shooting mode.
Image quality
Image size
White balance
Exposure compensation
Picture Control
High ISO noise reduction
Color space
Vignette control
4
Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J to
create a JPEG copy of the
selected photograph. To exit
without copying the
photograph, press the G
button.
U
354
Resize
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create small copies of selected photographs.
1
Select Resize.
Highlight Resize and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will
be displayed.
2
Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and
press 2.
The following options will be
displayed; highlight an option
and press J.
Option Size (pixels) Option Size (pixels)
2.5 M 1920 × 1280 0.6 M 960 × 640
1.1 M 1280 × 856 0.3 M 640 × 424
U
355
3
Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.
The dialog shown at right will
be displayed; highlight
pictures using the multi
selector and press the center of
the multi selector to select or
deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the N button).
Selected pictures are marked by a 8 icon. Press J when the
selection is complete. Note that photographs taken at an
image-area setting of 5 : 4 (0 79) can not be resized.
4
Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight Yes and
press J to save the resized copies.
A
Viewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.
A
Image Quality
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos
have an image quality (0 83) of JPEG fine; copies created from JPEG
photos have the same image quality as the original.
U
356
Side-by-Side Comparison
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs.
❚❚ Making a Side-by-Side Comparison
1
Select Side-by-side
comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side
comparison and press 2 to
display a picture selection
dialog.
2
Select a picture.
Use the multi selector to
highlight a picture and press
J. Only retouched copies
(shown by a N icon) or
photographs that have been
retouched can be selected. To view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press and hold the N button.
U
357
3
Compare the copy with the
original.
Options used to
create copy
The source image is displayed
on the left, the retouched copy
on the right, with the options
used to create the copy listed
at the top of the display. Press
Source Retouched
4 or 2 to switch between the
image
copy
source image and the
retouched copy. To view the highlighted picture full frame,
press and hold the N button. If the copy was created from
two images using Image overlay, press 1 or 3 to view the
other source image. To exit to retouch menu, press the G
button. To return to Step 2 with the highlighted image
selected, press J.
D
Side-by-Side Comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that was protected (0 238), has since been deleted or
hidden (0 275), is on a card that is now in a different slot, or contains
embedded image authentication information (0 334).
U
358
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
To display My Menu, press G and select the O (My Menu) tab.
G button
The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized
list of options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings,
setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If
desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu
(0 363).
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.
Adding Options to My Menu
1
Select Add items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Add
items and press 2.
2
Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the
menu containing the option
you wish to add and press 2.
U
359
3
Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu
item and press J.
4
Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new
item up or down in My Menu.
Press J to add the new item.
5
Add more items.
The items currently displayed in My
Menu are indicated by a check mark.
Items indicated by a V icon can not be
selected. Repeat steps 1–4 to select
additional items.
U
360
Deleting Options from My Menu
1
Select Remove items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.
2
Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to
select or deselect. Selected
items are indicated by a check
mark.
3
Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J. A
confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
4
Delete the selected items.
Press J to delete the selected
items.
A
Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O
button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to
remove the selected item from My Menu.
U
361
Reordering Options in My Menu
1
Select Rank items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.
2
Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to
move and press J.
3
Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item
up or down in My Menu and
press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to
reposition additional items.
A
Reordering Items in My Menu
The item currently highlighted in My Menu can be moved up or down
by pressing the N button and pressing 1 or 3. Release the N button
when the operation is complete.
U
362
Displaying Recent Settings
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select m Recent
settings for O My Menu > Choose tab.
1
Select Choose tab.
In My Menu (O), highlight
Choose tab and press 2.
2
Select m Recent settings.
Highlight m Recent settings
and press J. The name of the
menu will change from “MY
MENU” to “RECENT SETTINGS.”
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu
as they are used. To view My Menu again, select O My Menu for
m Recent settings > Choose tab.
A
Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press
the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to
delete the selected item.
U
363
U
364
nTechnical Notes
– Camera Care, Options, and Resources
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera.
Compatible Lenses................................................................ 366
Other Accessories.................................................................. 372
Caring for the Camera .......................................................... 377
Storage ......................................................................................................377
Cleaning....................................................................................................377
The Low-Pass Filter................................................................................378
Replacing the Focusing Screen ........................................................384
Replacing the Clock Battery...............................................................386
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .................. 388
Defaults ................................................................................... 392
Exposure Program................................................................. 397
Troubleshooting.................................................................... 398
Error Messages....................................................................... 403
Specifications......................................................................... 408
Calibrating Batteries .............................................................................417
Approved Memory Cards..................................................... 419
Memory Card Capacity......................................................... 420
Battery Life ............................................................................. 423
n
365
Compatible Lenses
Camera setting
Focus mode
S
C
CPU lenses 1
Lens/accessory
Type G or D AF NIKKOR 2
✔
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR
PC-E NIKKOR series
—
PC Micro 85mm
—
f/2.8D 4
7
AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter ✔ 8
Other AF NIKKOR
✔9
(except lenses for F3AF)
AI-P NIKKOR
—
AI-, AI-modified, NIKKOR
—
or Nikon Series E lenses 12
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm
—
f/4
Reflex-NIKKOR
—
PC-NIKKOR
—
—
AI-type Teleconverter 18
PB-6 Bellows Focusing
—
Attachment 19
Auto extension rings
(PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;
—
PN-11)
Non-CPU lenses 11
1
2
3
4
n
366
5
6
7
8
Exposure
Metering system
mode
a
P
A
Z
S
M 3D Color b
M (with
electronic
rangefinder)
M
✔
✔
✔5
✔ ✔5 ✔5 ✔5
— ✔ 3,5
✔5
✔
— ✔6 ✔
— ✔ 3,5
✔8
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔3
✔9
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔3
✔ 10
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔3
✔ 10
✔
— ✔ 13 — ✔ 14 ✔ 15
✔
✔
— ✔ 16 —
—
✔5
✔8
✔
✔
✔
— ✔ 13 — — ✔ 15
— ✔ 17 — — ✔
— ✔ 13 — ✔14 ✔ 15
✔8
✔
— ✔ 20 —
—
✔
✔8
✔
— ✔ 13 —
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔3
—
IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.
Spot metering meters selected focus point (0 116).
The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work
properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than
the maximum aperture is used.
Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
Manual exposure mode only.
Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (0 368).
With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–
70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at
maximum zoom, in-focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte
screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in
viewfinder is in focus.
10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
11 Some lenses can not be used (see page 369).
12 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera
body. Filters can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on
camera.
13 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 214), aperture
value will be displayed in viewfinder and top control panel.
14 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using
Non-CPU lens data (0 214). Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired
results are not achieved.
15 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using
Non-CPU lens data (0 214).
16 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than flash
sync speed by one step or more.
17 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-priority auto
exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE
lock and shifting lens. In manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens
aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens.
18 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–
105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. See
teleconverter manual for details.
19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required
depending on camera orientation.
20 Use preset aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture
using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking
photograph.
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.
n
367
A
Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G
and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel. Type G lenses are not
equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU contacts
CPU lens
Aperture ring
Type G lens
Type D lens
A
The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter
The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and
AF-I lenses:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED 1
AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED
AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II
AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED
AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED
AF-S 300mm f/4D ED 2
AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II
AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED
AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED
AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II 2
AF-S 500mm f/4D ED 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AF-I 500mm f/4D ED 2
AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II 2
AF-S 600mm f/4D ED 2
AF-I 600mm f/4D ED 2
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G
ED VR II
AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED 2
AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR
AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR 2
AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR 2
1 Autofocus not supported.
2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF-S Teleconverter TC-17E II/
TC-20E II.
A
Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.
n
368
A
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
If lens data are specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 214), many of the
features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non-CPU
lenses. If lens data are not specified, color matrix metering can not be
used, and center-weighted metering is used when matrix metering is
selected.
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes g and h, when
aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum
aperture has not been specified using Non-CPU lens data, the camera
aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum
aperture; the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture
ring. Aperture-priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure
modes e and f. The exposure-mode indicator (e or f ) in the top control
panel will blink, and g will be displayed in the viewfinder.
D
Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following can NOT be used with the D3S:
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing
unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6,
800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6,
8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers
174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers
174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers
280001–300490)
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm
f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,
AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900
or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers
851001–906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers
142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers
200111–200310)
n
369
A
Picture Angle and Focal Length
The D3S can be used with Nikon lenses for 35mm (135) format cameras.
If Auto DX crop is on and a 35mm format lens is attached, the picture
angle will be the same as a frame of 35mm film (36.0 × 23.9 mm); if a DX
lens is attached, the picture angle will automatically be adjusted to
23.5 × 15.6 mm (DX format).
To choose a picture angle different from that of the current lens, turn
Auto DX crop off and select from FX (36×24), 1.2× (30×20),
DX (24×16), and 5 : 4 (30×24). If a 35mm format lens is attached, the
picture angle could be reduced by 1.5 × by selecting DX (24×16) or by
1.2 × by selecting 1.2× (30×20), to expose a smaller area, or the aspect
ratio could be changed by selecting 5 : 4 (30×24).
FX (36×24) picture size (36.0 × 23.9 mm,
equivalent to 35mm format camera)
1.2× (30×20) picture size
(30.0 × 20.0 mm)
DX (24×16) picture size
(23.5 × 15.6 mm, equivalent to DX
format camera)
Lens
5 : 4 (30×24) picture size
(30.0 × 23.9 mm)
Picture diagonal
Picture angle (FX (36×24);
35mm format)
Picture angle (1.2× (30×20))
Picture angle (DX (24×16); DX format)
Picture angle (5 : 4 (30×24))
n
370
A
Picture Angle and Focal Length (Continued)
The DX (24×16) picture angle is about 1.5 times smaller than the 35mm
format picture angle, while the 1.2× (30×20) picture angle is about 1.2
times smaller and the 5 : 4 (30×24) picture angle is about 1.1 times
smaller. To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35mm format when
DX (24×16) is selected, multiply the focal length of the lens by about
1.5, by about 1.2 when is 1.2× (30×20) selected, or by about 1.1 when
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected (for example, the effective focal length of a
50mm lens in 35mm format would be 75 mm when DX (24×16) is
selected, 60 mm when 1.2× (30×20) is selected, or 55 mm when
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected).
n
371
Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for
the D3S.
• EN-EL4a and EN-EL4 Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries (0 26, 28):
Additional EN-EL4a/EN-EL4 batteries are available from
local retailers and Nikon service representatives. These
batteries can be recharged and calibrated using an MH-22
or MH-21 quick charger.
Power sources
• MH-22 and MH-21 Quick Chargers (0 26, 417): The MH-22,
MH-21 can be used to recharge EN-EL4a and EN-EL4
batteries.
• AC Adapter EH-6: This AC adapter can be used to power the
camera for extended periods.
• Wireless Transmitter WT-4: Connects the camera to wireless
and Ethernet networks. The photographs on the camera
memory card can be viewed by computers on the same
network or copied to a computer for long-term storage.
Wireless LAN
The camera can also be controlled from any computer on
adapters
the network using Camera Control Pro 2 (available
separately). Note that the WT-4 requires an independent
power source in the form of an optional EH-6 AC adapter
or EN-EL3e battery. See the WT-4 manual for details.
n
372
• Focusing Screens (0 384): The focusing screens available for
the D3S are listed below.
Type B
A type B focusing screen
Brite View clearis supplied with the
matte VI
camera.
focusing screen
Type E focusing screens
are etched with a grid,
making them suitable
Type E
for copying and
clear-matte VI
architectural
focusing screen
photography. Best
results are achieved with
PC-NIKKOR lenses.
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
• Rubber Eyepiece Cup DK-19: The DK-19 makes the image in the
viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.
• Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK-17C: To accommodate
individual differences in vision, viewfinder lenses are
available with diopters of –3, –2, 0, +1, and +2 m–1. Use
diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can
not be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment
control (–3 to +1 m–1). Test diopter adjustment lenses
before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be
achieved. The DK-17C is equipped with a safety lock.
• Magnifying Eyepiece DK-17M: The DK-17M magnifies the view
through the viewfinder by approximately 1.2 × for greater
precision when framing. The DK-17M is equipped with a
safety lock.
• Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in
the viewfinder. Use for close-up photography, copying,
telephoto lenses, and other tasks that call for added
precision. DK-18 eyepiece adapter (available separately)
required.
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-18: The DK-18 is used when attaching
the DG-2 magnifier or DR-3 right-angle viewing
attachment to the D3S.
n
373
• DK-14 and DK-17A Antifog Finder Eyepieces: These viewfinder
eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or cold conditions.
The DK-17A is equipped with a safety lock.
• DR-5 and DR-4 Right-Angle Viewing Attachments: The DR-5 and
Viewfinder
DR-4 attach to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle,
eyepiece
allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from
above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting
accessories
position. The DR-5 can also magnify the view through the
viewfinder by 2 × for greater precision when framing
(note that the edges of the frame will not be visible when
the view is magnified).
• Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-on,
slip-in, and rear-interchange. Use Nikon filters; filters
manufactured by other makers may interfere with
autofocus or electronic range finding.
• The D3S can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use
the C-PL circular polarizing filter instead.
• Use NC filters to protect the lens.
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended
Filters
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when
a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S,
ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for
details.
• Nikon SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 Speedlights
• Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB-R200 controlled remotely
Optional flash using the SB-900, SB-800 flash unit or SU-800 wireless
units
Speedlight commander.
• Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800
See page 187 for more information.
• Water Guard WG-AS1: The optional WG-AS1 is a water guard
that covers the base of SB-900 flash units mounted on the
Water guards
D3S, increasing the SB-900’s splash resistance by
protecting the accessory shoe contacts from rain and
spray.
n
374
PC card
adapters
Software
• EC-AD1 PC Card Adapter: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows
Type I CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in
PCMCIA card slots.
• Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package with such
advanced editing features as selection control points and
an auto retouch brush.
• Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a
computer and save photographs directly to the computer
hard disk.
• Image Authentication: Determine whether photographs
taken with image authentication (0 334) on have been
modified after shooting.
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon
software offers an auto update feature when the computer is
connected to the Internet. See the websites listed on page xxiv
for the latest information on supported operating systems.
Body cap
• BF-1B and BF-1A Body Caps: The body cap keeps the mirror,
viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of dust when a
lens is not in place.
n
375
Remote
terminal
accessories
n
376
The D3S is equipped with a ten-pin
remote terminal for remote control
and automatic photography. The
terminal is provided with a cap,
which protects the contacts when
the terminal is not in use. The
following accessories can be used
(all lengths are approximate):
• Remote Cord MC-22: Remote shutter release with blue, yellow,
and black terminals for connection to a remote shuttertriggering device, allowing control via sound or electronic
signals (length 1 m/3 ft. 3 in.).
• Remote Cord MC-30: Remote shutter release; can be used to
reduce camera shake (length 80 cm/2 ft. 7 in.).
• Remote Cord MC-36: Remote shutter release; can be used for
interval timer photography or to reduce camera shake or
keep the shutter open during a time exposure (length
85 cm/2 ft. 9 in.).
• Extension Cord MC-21: Can be connected to ML-3 or MC-series
20, 22, 23, 25, 30, or 36. Only one MC-21 can be used at a
time (length 3 m/9 ft. 10 in.).
• Connecting Cord MC-23: Connects two cameras for
simultaneous operation (length 40 cm/1 ft. 4 in.).
• Adapter Cord MC-25: Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for
connection to devices with two-pin terminals, including
the MW-2 radio control set, MT-2 intervalometer, and ML-2
modulite control set (length 20 cm/8 in.).
• GPS Unit GP-1 (0 217): Record latitude, longitude, altitude,
and UTC time with pictures.
• GPS Adapter Cord MC-35 (0 217): Connects GPS devices to D3S
via PC cable supplied by manufacturer of GPS device
(length 35 cm/1 ft. 2 in.).
• Modulite Remote Control Set ML-3: Allows infrared remote
control at ranges of up to 8 m (26 ft. 3 in.).
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove
the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in
place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or
camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a
soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside,
Camera
wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled
body
water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under
warranty.
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and
lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can
Lens,
mirror, and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove
viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a
Monitor
soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this
could result in damage or malfunction.
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
n
377
The Low-Pass Filter
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted
with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or
dust on the filter is appearing in photographs, you can clean the
filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu. The
filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is
turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
1
Place the camera base down.
Image sensor cleaning is most effective
when the camera is placed base down as
shown at right.
2
Select Clean image
sensor in the setup
menu.
Press G to display the
menus. Highlight Clean
image sensor in the setup
menu and press 2.
n
378
G button
3
Select Clean now.
Highlight Clean now and press
2.
The message shown at right will be
displayed while cleaning is in progress.
The message shown at right will be
displayed when cleaning is complete.
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
1
Select Clean at startup/
shutdown.
Display the Clean image
sensor menu as described in
Step 2 on the previous page.
Highlight Clean at startup/
shutdown and press 2.
n
379
2
Select an option.
Highlight one of the following
options and press J.
Option
Description
The image sensor is automatically cleaned
5 Clean at startup
each time the camera is turned on.
The image sensor is automatically cleaned
Clean at
6
during shutdown each time the camera is
shutdown
turned off.
Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at
7
& shutdown
startup and at shutdown.
8 Cleaning off
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
D
Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls interrupts image sensor cleaning.
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low-pass filter. If dust can not be
fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean
the image sensor manually (0 381) or consult a Nikon-authorized
service representative.
n
380
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image
sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s
internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using
the Clean image sensor (0 378) option in the setup menu, the
filter can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however,
that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon
recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel.
1
Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the low-pass filter. If the battery level is below J
(60%), turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged EN-EL4a
battery or connect an optional EH-6 AC adapter.
2
Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
Remove the lens and turn the camera on.
Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in
the setup menu and press 2 (note that
this option is not available at battery
levels of J or below).
3
Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor and a row of
dashes will appear in the top control
panel and viewfinder. To restore normal
operation without inspecting the lowpass filter, turn the camera off.
n
381
4
Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down.
The mirror will be raised and
the shutter curtain will open,
revealing the low-pass filter. The display in the viewfinder will
turn off and the row of dashes in the top control panel will
blink.
5
Examine the low-pass filter.
Holding the camera so that light falls on
the low-pass filter, examine the filter for
dust or lint. If no foreign objects are
present, proceed to Step 7.
6
Clean the filter.
Remove any dust and lint from the filter
with a blower. Do not use a blowerbrush, as the bristles could damage the
filter. Dirt that can not be removed with a
blower can only be removed by Nikonauthorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should
you touch or wipe the filter.
7
Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.
n
382
D
Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers
off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To
prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and
the self-timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close
and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End cleaning
or inspection immediately.
D
Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from
coming into contact with the low-pass filter during production and
shipping. The D3S, however, is designed to be used with
interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when
lenses are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign
matter may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in
photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera
when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign
matter that may be adhering to the body cap.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter
as described above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service
personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on
the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available separately;
0 375) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging
applications.
D
Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or
Nikon service representative once every one to two years, and that it be
serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these
services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories
regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units,
should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
n
383
Replacing the Focusing Screen
A type B clear-matte VI focusing screen is inserted in the camera at
shipment. To insert an optional type E clear-matte VI focusing
screen for D3S cameras (0 373):
1
Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
2
Unlatch the screen holder.
Using the tweezers supplied with the
focusing screen, pull the focusing screen
latch towards you. The screen holder will
spring open.
3
Remove the existing screen.
Remove the existing screen, using the
supplied tweezers and being careful to
handle the screen by the tab to avoid
scratches.
4
Insert the replacement screen.
Using the tweezers and handling the
screen by the tab, set the replacement
screen in the holder.
n
384
5
Latch the screen holder.
Push the front edge of holder upward
until it clicks into place.
D
Replacing Focusing Screens
Do not touch the surface of the mirror or focusing screens.
A
Framing Grids
The display in type E focusing screens may be slightly out of position
depending on how the focusing screen is placed.
n
385
Replacing the Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery with a life
of about four years. If the B icon is displayed in the top control
panel while the exposure meters are on, the battery is running low
and needs to be replaced. When the battery is exhausted, the B
icon will blink while the exposure meters are on. Photographs can
still be taken but will not be stamped with the correct time and
date, and interval timer photography will not function correctly.
Replace the battery as described below.
1
Remove the main battery.
The clock battery chamber is located on the roof of the main
battery chamber. Turn the camera off and remove the EN-EL4a
battery.
2
Open the clock battery chamber.
Slide the clock battery chamber cover
toward the front of the main battery
chamber.
3
Remove the clock battery.
4
Insert the replacement battery.
Insert a new CR1616 lithium battery so
that the positive side (the side marked
with “+” and the battery name) is visible.
n
386
5
Close the clock battery chamber.
Slide the clock battery chamber cover
towards the back of the main battery
chamber until it clicks into place.
6
Replace the main battery.
Reinsert the EN-EL4a.
7
Set the camera clock.
Set the camera to the current date and
time (0 34). Until the date and time have
been set, the B icon will flash in the top
control panel.
ACAUTION
Use only CR1616 lithium batteries. Using another type of battery could
cause an explosion. Dispose of used batteries as directed.
D
Inserting the Clock Battery
Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation. Inserting the battery
incorrectly could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could
damage the camera.
n
387
Caring for the Camera and
Battery: Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed
in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal
mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as
occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause
condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the
device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden
changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or
magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by
equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor,
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal
circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun
or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light may
cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in
photographs.
n
388
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In
rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or
go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon
return to normal.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently
removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (0 378) for information on cleaning the low-pass
filter.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily
damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the
curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents
from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain.
The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored, but this has no
affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a
month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
n
389
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while
images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these
circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory
or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is
connected.
Dry the accessory shoe cover: If the camera is used in the rain, water may
penetrate the supplied BS-2 accessory shoe cover. Remove and dry the
accessory shoe cover after using the camera in the rain.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit
or that do not light. This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not
indicate a malfunction. Images recorded with the product are unaffected.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois
leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching
the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
n
390
Batteries: Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from
functioning and should be removed with a soft, dry cloth before use.
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when handling batteries:
Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
The battery may become hot when used for extended periods. Observe
due caution when handling the battery.
Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
After removing the battery from the camera, be sure to replace the
terminal cover.
Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important
occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on
your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on
short notice.
On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the
battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold
weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as
necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery
performance.
Used batteries are a valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in
accord with local regulations.
n
391
Defaults
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed
below. For information on two-button reset, see page 200.
❚❚ Playback Menu Defaults
Option
Playback folder (0 275)
Image review (0 281)
After delete (0 281)
Rotate tall (0 282)
Slide show (0 282)
Frame interval (0 282)
Audio Playback (0 283)
Default
NCD3S
Off
Show next
Off
2s
Off
❚❚ Shooting Menu Defaults 1
n
392
Option
Extended menu banks (0 287)
File naming (0 290)
Slot 2 (0 88)
Image quality (0 83)
Image size (0 86)
Image area (0 78)
Auto DX crop (0 78)
Choose image area (0 79)
JPEG compression (0 85)
NEF (RAW) recording (0 85)
Type
NEF (RAW) bit depth
White balance (0 149)
Fine tuning (0 153)
Choose color temp. (0 157)
Set Picture Control (0 170)
Color space (0 183)
Active D-Lighting (0 181)
Vignette control (0 290)
Default
Off
DSC
Overflow
JPEG normal
Large
On
FX (36×24)
Size priority
Lossless compressed
12-bit
Auto
Off
5000 K
Standard
sRGB
Off
Normal
Long exp. NR (0 291)
Off
High ISO NR (0 291)
Normal
ISO sensitivity settings (0 109)
ISO sensitivity (0 110)
200
ISO sensitivity auto control (0 112)
Off
Live view mode (0 55, 59)
Tripod
Multiple exposure (0 202) 2
Multiple exposure mode (0 203)
Off
Number of shots (0 204)
2
Auto gain (0 205)
On
Movie settings (0 70)
Quality (0 70)
640 × 424 (3 : 2)
Microphone (0 71)
Auto sensitivity (A)
Destination (0 71)
Slot 1
High-sensitivity movie mode (0 72)
Off
Interval timer shooting (0 208)
Reset 3
1 Default settings can be restored using Reset shooting menu (0 287).
With the exception of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting,
only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset.
2 Applies to all banks. Reset shooting menu can not be selected while
shooting is in progress.
3 Applies to all banks. Shooting ends when reset is performed.
❚❚ Custom Settings Menu Defaults *
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
Option
AF-C priority selection (0 295)
AF-S priority selection (0 296)
Dynamic AF area (0 296)
Focus tracking with lock-on (0 298)
AF activation (0 298)
Focus point illumination (0 299)
Manual focus mode
Continuous mode
Focus point brightness
Default
Release
Focus
9 points
3 (Normal)
Shutter/AF-ON
On
On
Normal
n
393
a7
a8
a9
a10
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
c1
c2
c3
c4
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
n
394
d6
d7
d8
d9
Option
Focus point wrap-around (0 299)
AF point selection (0 300)
AF-ON button (0 300)
Vertical AF-ON button (0 301)
ISO sensitivity step value (0 302)
EV steps for exposure cntrl. (0 302)
EV steps for exposure comp. (0 302)
Easy exposure compensation (0 303)
Center-weighted area (0 304)
Fine tune optimal exposure (0 304)
Matrix metering
Center-weighted metering
Spot metering
Shutter-release button AE-L (0 305)
Auto meter-off delay (0 305)
Self-timer (0 305)
Monitor off delay (0 306)
Playback
Menus
Information display
Image review
Beep (0 306)
Shooting speed (0 307)
Continuous high-speed
Continuous low-speed
Max. continuous release (0 307)
File number sequence (0 308)
Control panel/viewfinder (0 309)
Rear control panel
Viewfinder display
Information display (0 309)
Screen tips (0 310)
LCD illumination (0 310)
Exposure delay mode (0 310)
Default
No wrap
51 points
AF-ON
AF-ON
1/3 step
1/3 step
1/3 step
Off
ø 12 mm
0
0
0
Off
6s
10 s
10 s
20 s
10 s
4s
Off
9 fps
5 fps
130
On
ISO sensitivity
Frame count
Auto
On
Off
Off
Option
Default
Flash sync speed (0 311)
1/250 s
Flash shutter speed (0 312)
1/60 s
Modeling flash (0 312)
On
Auto bracketing set (0 312)
AE & flash
Auto bracketing (Mode M) (0 313)
Flash/speed
Bracketing order (0 313)
MTR > under > over
Multi selector center button (0 314)
Shooting mode
Select center focus point
Playback mode
Thumbnail on/off
Live view
Start movie recording
f2 Multi selector (0 315)
Do nothing
f3 Photo info/playback (0 315)
Info /Playback
f4 Assign Fn button (0 316)
Fn button press (0 316)
None
Fn button + command dials (0 318)
Choose image area
f5 Assign preview button (0 321)
Preview button press
Preview
Preview + command dials
None
f6 Assign AE-L/AF-L button (0 321)
AE-L/AF-L button press
AE/AF lock
AE-L/AF-L + command dials
None
f7 Assign BKT button (0 322)
Auto bracketing
f8 Customize command dials (0 322)
Reverse rotation
No
Change main/sub
Off
Aperture setting
Sub-command dial
Menus and playback
Off
f9 Release button to use dial (0 324)
No
f10 No memory card? (0 324)
Enable release
f11 Reverse indicators (0 324)
* Defaults for the current Custom Settings bank can be restored using
Reset custom settings (0 294).
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
e6
f1
n
395
❚❚ Setup Menu Defaults
Option
LCD brightness (0 326)
Clean image sensor
Clean at startup/shutdown
HDMI (0 329)
Time zone and date (0 330)
Daylight saving time
Auto image rotation (0 332)
Voice memo options (0 246)
Voice memo
Voice memo overwrite
Voice memo button
Audio output
Image authentication (0 334)
GPS (0 220)
Auto meter off
Use GPS to set camera clock
n
396
Default
0
Cleaning off
Auto
Off
On
Off
Disable
Press and hold
Via speaker
Off
Enable
Yes
Exposure Program
The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the
following graph:
12
14
f/1
16 15
f/1.4
1
/3
17
17
18
19
f/5.6
f/8
20
f/2.8
f/1.4 − f/16
Aperture
f/2
f/4
21
f/11
22
f/16
23
f/22
f/32
13
11
9
10
8
7
5
6
3
2
4
0
1
-1
-3
-2
]
V
[E
-4
ISO 200; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4 D)
30" 15" 8" 4"
2"
1"
2
4
8
15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Shutter speed
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity;
the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent.
When matrix metering is used, values over 17 1/3 EV are reduced to
17 1/3 EV.
n
397
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon
representative.
❚❚ Display
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter
adjustment lenses (0 41, 373).
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (0 26, 43).
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2
(Auto meter-off delay) or c4 (Monitor off delay) (0 305, 306).
Unusual characters displayed in top control panel: See “A Note on ElectronicallyControlled Cameras,” below.
Displays in control panels or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim: The response
times and brightness of these displays varies with temperature.
A
n
398
A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the
monitor or top control panel and the camera may stop functioning. In
most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static
charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery, and turn
the camera on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available
separately), disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera
on again. In the event of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative. Note that disconnecting the
power source as described above may result in loss of any data not
recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data
already recorded to the card will not be affected.
❚❚ Shooting
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
• Memory card is full or not inserted (0 36, 44).
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest
f-number. If B is displayed in the top control panel, select Aperture
ring for Custom Setting f8 (Customize command dials) > Aperture
setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture (0 323).
• Exposure mode S selected with A selected for shutter speed
(0 404).
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom Setting
d9 (Exposure delay mode; 0 310).
Photos are out of focus:
• Rotate focus-mode selector to S or C (0 90).
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock
(0 96, 99).
• Tripod selected in live view: camera will not focus when shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. Use AF-ON button (0 56).
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be
selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using
optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash unit, choose 1/250 s
(Auto FP) for full range of shutter speeds (0 311).
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Camera is in
focus mode C: use AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus (0 97).
Can not select focus point:
• Unlock focus selector lock (0 94).
• Auto-area AF selected for AF-area mode: choose another mode (0 92).
• Camera is in playback mode (0 221).
• Menus are in use (0 273).
• Press shutter-release button halfway to activate exposure meters (0 45).
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (0 83).
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off
(0 291).
n
399
Photos not recorded in live view mode:
• Sound of mirror clicking down when shutter-release button was pressed
halfway in hand-held mode was mistaken for sound of shutter (0 63).
• Unless Release is chosen for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority
selection), shutter release is disabled if camera is unable to focus when
focus mode S is selected in hand-held mode (0 63, 296).
Flicker or banding appear during live view or movie recording: Choose an option for
Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power
supply (0 330).
Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flash or other light
source with brief duration was used during live view or movie recording.
Highlights are “washed out” in movies or the live view display: Select Off for Highsensitivity movie mode (0 72).
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appears in photos:
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction
(0 110, 291).
• Shutter speed is slower than 1 s: use long exposure noise reduction
(0 291).
• Reddish areas or other artifacts appear in long time-exposures: turn long
exposure noise reduction on when shooting at a shutter speed of
“A” (0 291).
Photos are blotched or smeared:
• Clean lens.
• Clean low-pass filter (0 378).
Colors are unnatural:
• Adjust white balance to match light source (0 150).
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0 170).
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 160).
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created
with D3S (0 164).
White balance bracketing unavailable:
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image quality
(0 83).
• Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0 207).
n
400
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for
sharpening, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of
photographs, choose a setting other than A (auto) (0 174).
Can not adjust Picture Control contrast or brightness: Contrast and brightness can
not be adjusted when Active D-Lighting is on. Turn Active D-Lighting off
(0 174, 182).
Metering can not be changed: Live view is in progress, autoexposure lock is in
effect, or movie is being recorded (0 61, 69, 133).
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose exposure mode e, f, or g
(0 134).
Sound is not recorded with movies:
• Microphone off is selected for Movie settings > Microphone (0 71).
• External microphone is disconnected during recording.
❚❚ Playback
Flashing areas, shooting data, or graphs appear on images: Press 1 or 3 to choose
photo information displayed, or change settings for Display mode
(0 225, 277).
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF +
JPEG (0 84).
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder
(0 275).
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
• Select On for Rotate tall (0 282).
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 332).
• Photo is displayed in image review (0 224).
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0 332).
Can not delete photo: Photo is protected. Remove protection (0 238).
Can not retouch picture: Picture was not created with D3S (0 342).
Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback: Select All for
Playback folder (0 275).
n
401
Can not change print order: Memory card is full: delete photos (0 44, 240).
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG
copy using NEF (RAW) processing (0 353) or transfer to computer and
print using ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately;
0 375).
Can not print photos: NEF (RAW) and TIFF photos can not be printed by direct
USB connection. Use DPOF print service (TIFF images only), create JPEG
copy using NEF (RAW) processing (0 353), or transfer to computer and
print using ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately;
0 375).
Photo is not displayed on TV: Choose correct video mode (0 329).
Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable
(available separately) is connected (0 271).
NEF (RAW) photos not displayed in Capture NX: Update to Capture NX 2 (0 375).
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor
cleaning changes the position of dust on the low-pass filter. Dust off
reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can
not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor
cleaning is performed (0 327).
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party software
does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting, or vignette
control. Use ViewNX (supplied) or optional Nikon software such as
Capture NX 2 (available separately).
Can not copy pictures to computer using Nikon Transfer: Operating system is not
supported (0 254). Transfer pictures from the memory card using a card
reader or card slot.
❚❚ Miscellaneous
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (0 34).
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that
Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an
optional AC adapter (0 333).
n
402
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in
the viewfinder, top control panel, and monitor.
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
B
(blinks)
H
d
Problem
Lens aperture ring is
not set to minimum
aperture.
Low battery.
• Battery exhausted.
• Battery can not be
used.
H
d • An extremely
(blinks) (blinks) exhausted
rechargeable Li-ion
battery or a thirdparty battery is
inserted in the
camera.
B
(blinks)
F
—
Solution
0
Set ring to minimum
aperture (largest
32
f-number).
Ready a fully-charged
43
spare battery.
• Recharge or replace
battery.
• Contact Nikonauthorized service
representative.
• Replace the battery, xxiv, 26,
or recharge the
28
battery if the
rechargeable Li-ion
battery is exhausted.
Camera clock is not set. Set camera clock.
34
No lens attached, or
non-CPU lens attached
without specifying
Aperture value will be
maximum aperture.
displayed if maximum
Aperture shown in
aperture is specified.
stops from maximum
aperture.
214
n
403
Indicator
Control ViewProblem
Solution
0
panel finder
2 4 Camera unable to focus
—
Focus manually.
99
(blinks) using autofocus.
• Use a lower ISO
110
sensitivity
374
• Use optional ND filter.
Subject too bright;
In exposure mode:
q
photo will be
f Increase shutter
122
overexposed.
speed
123
g Choose a smaller
aperture (larger
f-number)
• Use a higher ISO
110
sensitivity
187
• Use optional flash. In
exposure mode:
Subject too dark; photo
r
f Lower shutter
122
will be underexposed.
speed
g Choose a larger
123
aperture (smaller
f-number)
Change shutter speed
A
A selected in
or select manual
122, 125
(blinks)
exposure mode f.
exposure mode.
Live view is not
a button pressed
1 k
available while
before multiple
207
(blinks) (blinks)
multiple exposures are
exposure is complete.
being shot.
Optional flash unit that
Change flash mode
c does not support i-TTL
setting on optional
189
(blinks) flash control attached
flash
unit.
(blinks)
and set to TTL.
n
404
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
Problem
Solution
Check photo in
If indicator blinks for 3s
c
monitor; if
—
after flash fires, photo
(blinks)
underexposed, adjust
may be underexposed.
settings and try again.
Flash unit that does not
Change flash sync
support red-eye
Y
mode or use flash unit
— reduction attached and
that supports red-eye
(blinks)
flash sync mode set to
reduction.
red-eye reduction.
• Reduce quality or
size.
Memory insufficient to • Delete photographs
after copying
record further photos
n j
important images to
at current settings, or
(blinks) (blinks)
computer or other
camera has run out of
device.
file or folder numbers.
• Insert new memory
card.
Release shutter. If error
persists or appears
O
Camera malfunction. frequently, consult
(blinks)
Nikon-authorized
service representative.
0
190
188
83, 86
240
36
—
n
405
Indicator
Control
panel
Solution
0
Turn camera off and
confirm that card is
36
correctly inserted.
• Use Nikon419
approved card.
• Check that contacts
—
are clean. If card is
This memory
card cannot be
damaged, contact
used.
retailer or Nikon
Card may be
representative.
(blinks) • Unable to create • Delete files or insert 36, 240
damaged.
new folder.
new memory card
Insert
after copying
another card.
important images
to computer or
other device.
Memory card has
Format memory card
This card is not
[C] not been
or insert new memory 36, 39
formatted.
(blinks) formatted for use
Format the card.
card.
in camera.
Failed to update
flash unit
firmware.
Firmware for flash
Contact a NikonFlash cannot be
unit mounted on
authorized service
—
used.
—
camera was not
Contact a Nikonrepresentative.
updated correctly.
authorized
service
representative.
Select folder
containing images
No images on
memory card or in from Playback folder
Folder contains
—
36, 275
folder(s) selected menu or insert
no images.
for playback.
memory card
containing images.
Monitor
Problem
Camera cannot
No memory card. S detect memory
card.
• Error accessing
memory card.
n
406
Indicator
Monitor
Control
panel
All images are
hidden.
—
File does not
contain image
data.
—
Cannot select
this file.
—
Check printer.
—
Check paper.
—
Paper jam.
—
Out of paper.
—
Check ink supply.
—
Out of ink.
—
Problem
Solution
No images can be
played back until
All photos in
another folder has
current folder are been selected or Hide
hidden.
image used to allow
at least one image to
be displayed.
File has been
created or
modified using a
File can not be played
computer or
back on camera.
different make of
camera, or file is
corrupt.
Selected image Images created with
can not be
other devices can not
retouched.
be retouched.
Check printer. To
resume, select
Printer error.
Continue (if
available).
Paper in printer is Insert paper of correct
not of selected
size and select
size.
Continue.
Paper is jammed Clear jam and select
in printer.
Continue.
Insert paper of
Printer is out of
selected size and
paper.
select Continue.
Check ink. To resume,
Ink error.
select Continue.
Printer is out of
Replace ink and select
ink.
Continue.
* See printer manual for more information.
0
275
—
342
259 *
259 *
259 *
259 *
259 *
259 *
n
407
Specifications
❚❚ Nikon D3S Digital Camera
Type
Type
Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
12.1 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
36.0 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon FX format)
Total pixels
12.87 million
Dust-reduction System
Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data
(requires optional Capture NX 2 software)
Storage
Image size (pixels)
File format
n
408
• FX (36×24) image area
4,256 × 2,832 (L) 3,184 × 2,120 (M) 2,128 × 1,416 (S)
• 1.2× (30×20) image area
3,552 × 2,368 (L) 2,656 × 1,776 (M) 1,776 × 1,184 (S)
• DX (24×16) image area
2,784 × 1,848 (L) 2,080 × 1,384 (M) 1,392 × 920 (S)
• 5 : 4 (30×24) image area
3,552 × 2,832 (L) 2,656 × 2,120 (M) 1,776 × 1,416 (S)
• NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed,
compressed, or uncompressed
• TIFF (RGB)
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4),
normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16)
compression (Size priority); Optimal quality
compression available
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both
NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Storage
Picture Control System
Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid,
Monochrome; selected Picture Control can be
modified; storage for custom Picture Controls
Media
Type I CompactFlash memory cards (UDMA compliant)
Double slot
Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for
separate storage of NEF (RAW) and JPEG images;
pictures can be copied between cards.
File system
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format), Exif 2.21 (Exchangeable
Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras), PictBridge
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder
Frame coverage
•
•
•
•
Magnification
Approx. 0.7 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1)
Eyepoint
18 mm (–1.0 m–1)
Diopter adjustment
–3–+1 m–1
Focusing screen
Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VI screen
with AF area brackets
Reflex mirror
Quick return
Depth-of-field preview
When Pv button is pressed, lens aperture is stopped
down to value selected by user (g and h modes) or by
camera (e and f modes)
Lens aperture
Instant return, electronically controlled
FX (36×24): Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
1.2× (30×20): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical
DX (24×16): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical
5:4 (30×24): Approx. 97% horizontal and 100% vertical
n
409
Lens
Compatible lenses
• DX AF NIKKOR: All functions supported
• Type G or D AF NIKKOR: All functions supported (PC
Micro-NIKKOR does not support some functions). IX
NIKKOR lenses not supported.
• Other AF NIKKOR: All functions supported except 3D color
matrix metering II. Lenses for F3AF not supported.
• AI-P NIKKOR: All functions supported except 3D color
matrix metering II
• Non-CPU: Can be used in exposure modes g and h;
color matrix metering and aperture value display
supported if user provides lens data (AI lenses only)
Electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum
aperture is f/5.6 or faster.
Shutter
Type
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane
shutter
Speed
1/8000
Flash sync speed
X= 1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/250 s or slower
– 30 s in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV, bulb, X250
Release
n
410
Release mode
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed),
CH (continuous high speed), J (quiet shutter-release),
E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up)
Approximate frame
advance rate
• DX (24×16): Up to 9 fps (CL) or 9–11 fps (CH)
• Other image areas: Up to 9 fps
Self-timer
Can be selected from 2, 5, 10, and 20 s duration
Exposure
Metering
TTL exposure metering using 1,005-pixel RGB sensor
Metering method
• Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D
lenses); color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses);
color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses
if user provides lens data
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 12 mm circle
in center of frame. Diameter of circle can be changed
to 8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting can be based on
average of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 12-mm
circle or average of entire frame)
• Spot: Meters 4 mm circle (about 1.5% of frame)
centered on selected focus point (on center focus
point when non-CPU lens is used)
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
• Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI
Exposure mode
Programmed auto with flexible program (e); shutterpriority auto (f ); aperture-priority auto (g); manual (h)
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV
Exposure bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV
Flash bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV
White balance
bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3
ADL bracketing
2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3–5
frames using preset values for all frames
Exposure lock
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L
button
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended
Exposure Index)
ISO 200 – 12800 in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV. Can also be
set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 100 equivalent)
below ISO 200 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, 2, or 3 EV
(ISO 102400 equivalent) above ISO 12800; auto ISO
sensitivity control available
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High, Normal,
Low, or Off
n
411
Focus
Autofocus
Nikon Multi-CAM 3500FX autofocus sensor module
with TTL phase detection, fine-tuning, and 51 focus
points (including 15 cross-type sensors)
Detection range
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Lens servo
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (S); continuous-servo AF
(C); predictive focus tracking automatically activated
according to subject status
• Manual (MF): Electronic range finding supported
Focus point
Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points
AF-area mode
Single-point AF, dynamic-area AF, auto-area AF
Focus lock
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button
halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L
button
Flash
n
412
Flash control
• TTL: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash
for digital SLR using 1,005-pixel RGB sensor are
available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400
• Auto aperture: Available with SB-900 or SB-800 and CPU
lens
• Non-TTL auto: Supported flash units include SB-900,
SB-800, SB-28, SB-27, and SB-22S
• Distance-priority manual: Available with SB-900 and SB-800
Flash mode
Front curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync
Flash-ready indicator
Lights when optional flash unit such as SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, SB-400, SB-80DX, SB-28DX, or SB-50DX is fully
charged; blinks after flash is fired at full output
Accessory shoe
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and
safety lock
Flash
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB-900,
System (CLS)
SB-800, or SU-800 as commander and SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, or SB-R200 as remotes; Auto FP High-Speed
Sync and modeling illumination supported with all
CLS-compatible flash units except SB-400; Flash Color
Information Communication and FV lock supported
with all CLS-compatible flash units
Sync terminal
ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread
White balance
White balance
Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight,
flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual (up to 5 values can
be stored), choose color temperature (2500 K–10000 K),
all with fine tuning.
Live view
Modes
Tripod, hand-held
Autofocus
• Tripod: Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame
• Hand-held: Phase-detection TTL AF with 51 focus
points (including 15 cross-type sensors)
Flicker reduction
50 Hz and 60 Hz
Movie
File format
• 1,280 × 720/24 fps
• 320 × 216/24 fps
AVI
Compression
Motion-JPEG
Audio
Microphone sensitivity can be adjusted
ISO sensitivity
ISO 200–12800 (ISO 6400–Hi 3 in high-sensitivity
movie mode)
Frame size (pixels)
• 640 × 424/24 fps
n
413
Monitor
Monitor
3-in., 921k-dot (VGA), low-temperature polysilicon TFT
LCD with 170 ° viewing angle, 100% frame coverage,
and brightness adjustment
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images) playback
with playback zoom, movie playback, slide show,
highlights, histogram display, auto image rotation,
image comment (up to 36 characters), and voice
memo input and playback
Interface
USB
Hi-Speed USB
Video output
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL; images can be
displayed on external device while camera monitor is on
HDMI output
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector; camera monitor
turns off when HDMI cable is connected
Audio input
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)
Ten-pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control, GP-1
GPS unit, or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183
version 2.01 or 3.01 (requires optional MC-35 GPS
adapter cord and cable with D-sub 9-pin connector)
Supported languages
Supported languages
Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish,
Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Indonesian,
Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish,
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish
Power source
Battery
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL4a battery
AC adapter
EH-6 AC adapter (available separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
n
414
1/4 in.
(ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 159.5 × 157 × 87.5 mm (6.3 × 6.2 × 3.4 in.)
Weight
Approx. 1,240 g (2 lb. 12 oz.) without battery, memory
card, body cap, or accessory shoe cover
Operating environment
Temperature
0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Humidity
Less than 85% (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged
battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes
that this manual may contain.
MH-22 quick charger
Rated input
AC 100–240 V (50/60 Hz)
Rated output
DC 12.6 V/1,200 mA
Supported batteries
Nikon EN-EL4a/EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Charging time per
battery
Approx. 2 hours and 25 minutes (EN-EL4a) or 1 hour
and 40 minutes (EN-EL4) when battery is fully
discharged
Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 160 × 85 × 50.5 mm (6.3 × 3.3 × 2.0 in.)
Length of cord
Approx. 1800 mm (5 ft. 11 in.)
Weight
Approx. 260 g (9.1 oz.), excluding power cable
EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion battery
Type
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity
11.1 V/2,500 mAh
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 56.5 × 27 × 82.5 mm (2.2 × 1.1 × 3.2 in.)
Weight
Approx. 180 g (6.3 oz.), excluding terminal cover
n
415
A
Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard
that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the
memory card.
• Exif version 2.21: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.21, a standard in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMIcompliant devices via a single cable connection.
n
416
Calibrating Batteries
The MH-22 quick charger is equipped with a battery calibration
feature. Calibrate the battery as required to ensure the accuracy of
the camera and charger battery level displays.
If the calibration lamp for the current
battery chamber blinks when a
battery is inserted, the battery needs
to be calibrated. To begin
calibration, press the calibration
button for the current chamber for
about a second. The time needed to
calibrate the battery is shown by the
charge and calibration lamps:
Approximate time needed
to recalibrate battery
Over 6 hours
4 – 6 hours
2 – 4 hours
Under 2 hours
Calibration
lamp
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)
Chamber
lamps (green)
Charge lamps
(green)
Calibration
lamps (yellow)
Calibration
buttons
2h
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)
JK (off )
Charge lamps
4h
K (glows)
K (glows)
JK (off)
JK (off)
6h
K (glows)
JK (off )
JK (off )
JK (off )
When calibration is complete, the calibration and charge lamps will
turn off and charging will begin immediately.
Although calibration is recommended for accurate measurement
of battery charge state, calibration need not be performed when
the calibration lamp blinks. Once begun, calibration can be
interrupted as desired.
• If the calibration button is not pressed while the calibration lamp
is blinking, normal charging will begin after about ten seconds.
• To interrupt calibration, press the calibration button again.
Calibration will end and charging will begin.
n
417
A
Battery Warning
If the chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when
no battery is inserted, there is a problem with the charger. If the
chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when a
battery is inserted, a problem has occurred with the battery or charger
during charging. Remove the battery, unplug the charger, and take the
battery and charger to a Nikon-authorized service representative for
inspection.
A
Charging and Calibrating Two Batteries
The MH-22 charges only one battery at a time. If batteries are inserted in
both chambers, they will be charged in the order inserted. If the
calibration button for the first battery is pressed, the second battery can
not be calibrated or charged until calibration and charging of the first
battery are complete.
n
418
Approved Memory Cards
The following Type I CompactFlash memory cards have been
tested and approved for use in the D3S. Type II cards and
microdrives can not be used.
Extreme Pro
Extreme
Extreme IV
SanDisk
Extreme III
Ultra II
Standard
Professional UDMA
Lexar
Media
Professional
Platinum II
SDCFXP
SDCFX
SDCFX4
SDCFX3
SDCFH
SDCFB
300 ×
233 ×
133 ×
80 ×
60 ×
16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
4 GB
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above
cards, please contact the manufacturer.
n
419
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 4 GB SanDisk Extreme IV (SDCFX4) card at
different image quality, image size, and image area settings.
❚❚ FX (36×24) Image Area *
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
TIFF (RGB)
JPEG fine 3
JPEG normal 3
JPEG basic 3
Image size
File size 1
No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2
—
11.3 MB
202
42
—
14.3 MB
155
36
—
10.1 MB
277
43
—
12.6 MB
229
36
—
19.1 MB
202
38
—
24.9 MB
155
35
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
36.1 MB
20.3 MB
9.1 MB
5.9 MB
3.3 MB
1.5 MB
2.9 MB
1.7 MB
0.8 MB
1.5 MB
0.9 MB
0.4 MB
107
191
423
559
995
2.1 K
1.0 K
1.9 K
4.1 K
2.1 K
3.6 K
7.8 K
36
42
59
82
130
130
122
130
130
124
130
130
* Includes images taken with non-DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX
crop.
n
420
❚❚ DX (24×16) Image Area *
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
TIFF (RGB)
JPEG fine 3
JPEG normal 3
JPEG basic 3
Image size
File size 1
No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2
—
5.2 MB
460
62
—
6.4 MB
356
54
—
4.5 MB
626
78
—
5.6 MB
522
59
—
8.3 MB
460
58
—
10.8 MB
356
52
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
15.5 MB
8.7 MB
4.0 MB
2.5 MB
1.4 MB
0.7 MB
1.3 MB
0.7 MB
0.4 MB
0.7 MB
0.4 MB
0.2 MB
249
441
964
1.2 K
2.2 K
4.8 K
2.5 K
4.1 K
8.9 K
4.8 K
7.8 K
15.6 K
46
57
95
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
* Includes images taken with DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop.
n
421
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 200.
Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression, ISO sensitivity is set
to Hi 0.3 or higher, High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or
ISO sensitivity is over ISO 3200, or long exposure noise reduction, Active
D-Lighting, or image authentication is on.
3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority. Selecting Optimal
quality increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer
capacity drop accordingly.
A
n
422
d3—Max. Continuous Release (0 307)
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single
burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 130.
Battery Life
The number of shots that can be taken with a fully-charged
EN-EL4a battery (2,500 mAh) varies with the condition of the
battery, temperature, and how the camera is used. Sample figures
are given below.
• CIPA standard: Approximately 4,200 shots. Measured at 23 °C/
73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity
to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings
once every 30 s. Live view not used.
• Nikon standard: Approximately 4,700 shots. Measured at 20 °C/
68 °F with an AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED lens under the
following test conditions: vibration reduction off, image quality
set to JPEG normal, image size set to L (large), shutter speed
1/250 s, shutter-release button pressed halfway for three
seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three
times; six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned
on for five seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once
exposure meters have turned off.
n
423
The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter
• Using the optional GP-1 GPS unit
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL4a
batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their
charge if left unused.
• Check the condition of the battery regularly using the Battery
info option in the setup menu (0 333). If j is displayed for
Calibration, calibrate the battery using the MH-22 quick charger
(if the battery has not been used for more than six months,
recharge the battery when calibration is complete).
n
424
Index
Symbols
K (Single-point AF) ....................... 92, 93
I (Dynamic-area AF) .......... 92, 93, 296
H (Auto-area AF) ............................ 92, 93
S .......................................... 90, 96, 102, 296
C .......................................... 90, 97, 295, 296
M ..................................................... 60, 90, 99
CL ............................................. 102, 104, 307
CH ............................................ 102, 104, 307
J ............................................................... 102
E (Self-timer)............................... 102, 106
MUP ................................................... 102, 108
a (Matrix).............................................. 116
Z (Center-weighted)................ 116, 304
b (Spot) ................................................. 116
e (Programmed auto) ........................ 120
f (Shutter-priority auto) ................... 122
g (Aperture-priority auto) ................ 123
h (Manual).............................................. 125
Q (Help) ............................................... 22, 25
t (Memory buffer) ....................... 49, 105
L (Preset manual) .................. 150, 158
R (Info) button................................ 14, 17
a (Live view) button ..................... 54, 66
D switch.......................................... 10, 310
Numerics
1,005-pixel RGB sensor...................... 192
1.2× (30 × 20)........................................... 79
12-bit .......................................................... 85
14-bit .......................................................... 85
3D color matrix metering II..... 116, 117
3D-tracking ............................. 92, 93, 297
5 : 4 (30 × 24)............................................ 79
51 points (3D-tracking) ..................... 297
A
A/V cable ............................................. i, 269
AC adapter............................................. 372
Accessories ............................................ 372
Active D-Lighting ....................... 145, 181
Active folder .......................................... 288
Add items (My Menu)......................... 359
ADL bracketing........................... 145, 312
Adobe RGB ............................................. 183
AE & flash (Auto bracketing set) .... 136,
312
AE only (Auto bracketing set) 136, 312
AE-L............................................ 97, 132, 321
AF......................... 90, 92, 94, 98, 295–301
AF activation.......................................... 298
AF area brackets....................... 12, 41, 62
AF assist................................................... 191
AF fine tune............................................ 339
AF point selection................................ 300
AF-area mode.......................................... 92
AF-C priority selection ....................... 295
B button .................................... 91, 300
B button for vertical shooting... 91,
301
AF-S priority selection........................ 296
After delete ............................................ 281
Amber ............................................ 154, 348
Aperture.............................. 123–126, 131
Aperture Lock........................................ 131
Aperture-priority auto ....................... 123
Approved memory cards .................. 419
Aspect ratio............................................ 347
Assign AE-L/AF-L button................... 321
Assign BKT button............................... 322
Assign Fn button.................................. 316
Assign preview button....................... 321
Attaching the lens ................................. 31
Audio..................................... 252, 282, 283
Audio output......................................... 252
Audio/video cable ............................ i, 269
Auto (White balance) ......................... 150
Auto bracketing ................ 136, 312, 313
Auto bracketing (Mode M) ............... 313
Auto bracketing set............................. 312
Auto DX crop .................................... 78, 81
Auto FP high-speed sync. ................. 311
425
Backlight.......................................... 10, 310
Backup (Slot 2)......................................... 88
Battery......................... 26, 28–30, 43, 333
Battery info ............................................ 333
Beep ......................................................... 306
D button....... 137, 141, 145, 204, 322
Black-and-white (Monochrome).... 347
Body cap...................................... 4, 31, 375
Border............................................. 261, 265
Bracketing........................... 136, 312, 313
Bracketing order .................................. 313
Bulb ................................................. 126, 128
Burst ................................................ 307, 317
C
Connector for external microphone . 4,
71
Continuous high speed .. 102, 104, 307
Continuous low speed .... 102, 104, 307
Continuous release mode....... 102, 104
Continuous-servo AF.. 90, 97, 295, 296
Contrast-detect autofocus ... 54, 56, 58
Control panel...................................... 8–11
Copy image(s) ....................................... 278
Copyright...................................... 232, 335
Copyright information ....................... 335
CPU contacts ......................................... 368
CPU lens ........................................... 32, 366
Creative Lighting System ........ 186, 187
Cropping (PictBridge [Setup] menu) ....
262
Custom setting bank .......................... 294
Custom Settings ................................... 292
Customize command dials ............... 322
Cyanotype (Monochrome) ............... 347
D
Calibrating ................................... 417–418
Camera Control Pro 2................ 257, 375
Capture NX 2......................... 84, 327, 375
Center-weighted ........................ 116, 304
Center-weighted area........................ 304
Center-weighted metering..... 116, 304
Charging the battery .................... 26–27
Choose color temp. (White balance).....
150, 157
Choose image area ......................... 79, 81
Clean image sensor ............................ 378
Clock ................................................. 34, 330
Clock battery.................................. 35, 386
Cloudy (White balance) .................... 150
CLS............................................................ 187
Color balance........................................ 348
Color space ............................................ 183
Color temperature ........... 150, 152, 157
CompactFlash................................ 36, 419
Compatible lenses .............................. 366
Compressed (Type)................................ 85
Computer............................................... 254
Date and time................................. 34, 330
Date format..................................... 35, 330
Daylight saving time.................... 34, 330
DCF version 2.0 ........................... 184, 416
Default settings ....... 200, 287, 294, 392
Delete................................................ 52, 240
Delete all images.................................. 242
Delete current image................... 52, 240
Depth-of-field ....................................... 119
Depth-of-field preview button ...... 119,
312, 321
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) 258,
263, 267, 416
Diopter..................................................... 373
Direct sunlight (White balance)...... 150
Display mode ........................................ 277
D-Lighting .............................................. 344
DPOF............................ 258, 263, 267, 416
Dust off ref photo ................................ 327
DX (24 × 16).............................................. 79
Dynamic AF area .................................. 296
Dynamic-area AF.................... 92, 93, 296
Auto image rotation........................... 332
Auto meter off ............................... 45, 305
Auto meter-off delay.......................... 305
Auto-area AF ..................................... 92, 93
Autofocus......... 90, 92, 94, 98, 295–301
B
426
E
Easy exposure compensation......... 303
Electronic rangefinder....................... 100
Ethernet......................................... 257, 372
EV steps for exposure cntrl. ............. 302
Exif version 2.21.......................... 184, 416
Exposure............ 115, 116, 118, 132, 134
Exposure bracketing ....... 136, 312, 313
Exposure compensation................... 134
Exposure delay mode........................ 310
Exposure indicator.............................. 127
Exposure lock ....................................... 132
Exposure meters.................. 45, 116, 305
Exposure mode.................................... 118
Exposure program .............................. 397
Extended menu banks ...................... 287
External microphone ............................ 71
F
File information ................................... 226
File naming............................................ 290
File number sequence....................... 308
Filter effects........................................... 348
Filter effects (Set Picture Control). 173,
174
Fine tune optimal exposure ............ 304
Firmware version................................. 340
Flash............................. 186, 187, 193, 196
Flash (White balance) ........................ 150
Flash bracketing ............... 136, 312, 313
Flash control.......................................... 192
Flash mode ............................................ 193
Flash only (Auto bracketing set) ... 136,
312
Flash range ............................................ 195
Flash ready indicator 13, 190, 197, 412
Flash shutter speed ............................ 312
Flash sync speed.................................. 311
Flash sync terminal............................. 186
Flexible program ................................. 121
Flicker reduction.................... 54, 68, 330
Fluorescent (White balance) ........... 150
Fn button ................................ 82, 197, 316
f-number ............................. 123, 124, 368
Focal length ....................... 214, 370–371
Focal plane mark.................................. 100
Focus ....................... 89, 90, 92, 94, 96, 99
Focus indicator .............................. 49, 100
Focus lock ................................................. 96
Focus mode ............................................. 90
Focus mode switch ............................... 32
Focus point ............. 56, 92, 94, 296, 300
Focus point wrap-around ................. 299
Focus tracking...................... 91, 297, 298
Focus tracking with lock-on............. 298
Focusing screen................. 373, 384, 409
Format .............................................. 39, 326
Format memory card.......................... 326
Frame interval (Slide show).............. 282
Front-curtain sync ............................... 193
Full-frame playback............................. 222
FV lock...................................................... 196
FX (36 × 24) .............................................. 79
G
GPS.................................................. 217, 233
GPS data.................................................. 233
GPS unit................................................... 217
H
Hand-held................................................. 59
HDMI ..................................... 271, 329, 416
HDMI mini-pin connector...................... 4
Help ..................................................... 22, 25
Hi................................................................ 111
Hide image............................................. 275
High definition................... 271, 329, 416
High ISO NR ........................................... 291
Highlights ............................................... 227
High-sensitivity movie mode ............ 72
Histogram..................................... 228, 229
I
Image area........................... 32, 78, 81, 86
Image authentication......................... 334
Image comment................................... 331
Image Dust Off ref photo.................. 327
Image file ................................................ 416
Image overlay........................................ 349
427
Image quality........................................... 83
Image review ............................... 224, 281
Image size ................................................. 86
Incandescent (White balance)........ 150
Index print ............................................. 266
In-focus indicator ............................ 49, 90
Information .................................. 225, 277
Information display ..................... 14, 309
Interval timer shooting ..................... 208
ISO sensitivity .................... 109, 110, 112
ISO sensitivity auto control.............. 112
ISO sensitivity step value.................. 302
i-TTL.......................................................... 192
i-TTL balanced-fill flash for digital SLR..
192
J
JPEG...................................................... 83, 88
JPEG basic ................................................. 83
JPEG compression.................................. 85
JPEG fine.................................................... 83
JPEG normal ............................................. 83
L
L (large)....................................................... 86
LAN........................................................... 372
Language ........................................ 33, 331
LCD ........................................... 10, 310, 326
LCD brightness..................................... 326
LCD illumination.................................. 310
Lens ......................... 31–32, 214, 339, 366
Lens cap..................................................... 31
Lens distance information ............... 192
Lens focus ring ................................. 31, 99
Lens mount.......................................... 5, 32
Lens mounting index............................ 31
Live view.............................. 53–63, 66–69
Live view mode................................ 55, 59
Lo............................................................... 111
Lock mirror up for cleaning ............. 381
Long exp. NR ......................................... 291
Lossless compressed (Type) ............... 85
M
M (medium)............................................... 86
428
Magenta ........................................ 154, 348
Manage Picture Control..................... 176
Manual (Exposure mode).................. 125
Manual (Focus mode)............. 60, 90, 99
Manual focus ............................. 60, 90, 99
Matrix ....................................................... 116
Matrix metering.................................... 117
Max. continuous release.................... 307
Maximum aperture ................... 100, 214
Maximum sensitivity........................... 113
Memory buffer..................... 49, 102, 105
Memory card ................. 36, 39, 326, 419
Memory card capacity ....................... 420
Memory card slot................................... 37
Metering.................................................. 116
Metering selector.......................... 48, 117
Microphone ................................ 4, 5, 6, 71
Minimum aperture ....................... 32, 118
Minimum shutter speed.................... 113
Mired ........................................................ 155
Mirror....................................... 55, 108, 381
Mirror up ................................................. 108
Mirror up mode .......................... 102, 108
Modeling flash ............................ 119, 312
Monitor..................... 14, 51, 54, 222, 326
Monitor off delay ................................. 306
Monochrome......................................... 347
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) 170
Mounting index.................................. 5, 31
Movie settings......................................... 70
Movies........................................................ 66
Multi selector.................................. 23, 315
Multiple exposure................................ 202
My Menu ................................................. 359
N
NEF ................................................ 83, 84, 85
NEF (RAW)................................... 83, 84, 85
NEF (RAW) bit depth............................. 85
NEF (RAW) processing........................ 353
NEF (RAW) recording ............................ 85
Neutral (Set Picture Control)............ 170
Nikon Transfer ....................................... 254
No memory card? ................................ 324
No. of copies (PictBridge [Setup] menu)
261
Non-CPU lens ....................................... 214
Non-CPU lens data..................... 214, 215
O
Optimal quality (JPEG compression) 85
Overflow (Slot 2)..................................... 88
Overview data ...................................... 234
P
Page size........................................ 261, 265
Phase-detection autofocus ................ 54
Photo info ..................................... 225, 277
Photo info/playback........................... 315
PictBridge...................................... 258, 416
Picture angle......................... 78, 370–371
Picture Controls ................................... 170
Playback .......................................... 51, 221
Playback folder..................................... 275
Playback information................ 225, 277
Playback menu..................................... 274
Playback zoom ..................................... 237
Predictive focus tracking .............. 90, 91
Preset manual (White balance)..... 150,
158
Press the shutter-release button all the
way down................................................ 50
Press the shutter-release button
halfway............................. 49, 50, 96, 132
Print (DPOF)........................................... 263
Print options (PictBridge [Setup] menu)
261
Print select ............................................. 263
Print set (DPOF).................................... 267
Printing ................................................... 258
Programmed auto............................... 120
Protecting photographs................... 238
Pv button ...................... 67, 119, 312, 321
Q
Quality (Movie settings)....................... 70
R
RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Slot 2) ....... 88
Rear control panel .......................... 10–11
Rear-curtain sync ................................. 193
Recent settings ..................................... 363
Rechargeable Li-ion battery ........... i, 26
Red-eye correction.............................. 345
Red-eye reduction............................... 193
Release button to use dial ................ 324
Release mode........................................ 101
Release mode dial ............................... 103
Release mode dial lock release ....... 103
Remote cord ......................... 58, 128, 376
Remove items (My Menu)................. 361
Removing the lens from the camera 32
Reset...................................... 200, 287, 294
Reset custom settings........................ 294
Reset shooting menu ......................... 287
Resize ....................................................... 355
Restoring default settings ..... 200, 287,
294, 392
Retouch menu ...................................... 341
Reverse indicators ............................... 324
RGB........................................... 83, 183, 228
RGB Histogram ..................................... 228
Rotate tall ............................................... 282
S
S (small)...................................................... 86
Save/load settings ............................... 336
Saving camera settings...................... 336
Screen tips.............................................. 310
Self-timer ............................. 102, 106, 305
Sensitivity ............................ 109, 110, 112
Sepia (Monochrome).......................... 347
Set Picture Control .............................. 170
Setup menu ........................................... 325
Shade (White balance)....................... 150
Shooting data .................... 230, 231, 232
Shooting menu..................................... 284
Shooting menu bank.......................... 285
Shutter speed........... 122, 125–126, 130
Shutter speed lock .............................. 130
Shutter-priority auto........................... 122
Rank items (My Menu)....................... 362
429
Shutter-release button 49, 50, 96, 132,
305
Shutter-release button AE-L............ 305
Side-by-side comparison.................. 357
Single-frame.......................................... 102
Single-point AF ................................ 92, 93
Single-servo AF...................... 90, 96, 296
Size ....................................................... 70, 86
Size priority (JPEG compression) ...... 85
Skylight ................................................... 348
Slide show.............................................. 282
Slot............................................................... 36
Slot 1 .................................................... 37, 39
Slot 2 .................................................... 37, 88
Slot selection ........................................ 224
Slow sync................................................ 193
Speaker ............................................ 73, 251
Speedlights............................................ 186
Spot .......................................................... 116
Spot metering ...................................... 116
sRGB ......................................................... 183
Standard (Set Picture Control)........ 170
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR 192
Start printing................................ 262, 265
T
Television....................................... 269, 329
Ten-pin remote terminal.......... 217, 376
Thumbnail.............................................. 235
Thumbnail playback........................... 235
TIFF (RGB).................................................. 83
Time .................................................. 34, 330
Time stamp................................... 261, 265
Time zone........................................ 34, 330
Time zone and date..................... 34, 330
Timer............................................... 106, 208
Toning (Set Picture Control) ... 173, 175
Top control panel ................................ 8–9
Trim .......................................................... 346
Tripod ......................................................... 55
Two-button reset................................. 200
Type D lens ............................................ 368
Type G lens ............................................ 368
430
U
Uncompressed (Type) .......................... 85
USB.................................................. 255, 259
USB cable ................................... i, 255, 259
Use GPS to set camera clock ............ 220
UTC........................................... 34, 219, 233
V
Vertical shutter-release button lock 320
Video mode............................................ 329
Viewfinder ................................ 12, 41, 409
Viewfinder eyepiece ................. 106, 210
Viewfinder focus..................... 41, 42, 373
ViewNX ............................................. 84, 184
Vignette Control................................... 290
Virtual horizon ..................... 62, 318, 338
Vivid (Set Picture Control)................. 170
Voice memo ....................... 223, 245–252
Voice memo button ............................ 247
Voice memo overwrite....................... 247
W
Warm filter.............................................. 348
WB ................................................... 141, 150
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)....
141, 312
White balance ............................. 141, 150
White balance bracketing................. 141
Wireless.......................................... 257, 372
Wireless network........................ 257, 372
Wireless transmitter .................. 257, 372
WT-4................................................ 257, 372
431
432
DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB1F04(11)
6MB07411-04
En
Printed in Japan
En
Download PDF

advertising